diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation/scsi')
55 files changed, 4728 insertions, 2625 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX b/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX index e7da8c3a255..c4b978a72f7 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX @@ -2,14 +2,20 @@ - this file 53c700.txt - info on driver for 53c700 based adapters -AM53C974.txt - - info on driver for AM53c974 based adapters BusLogic.txt - info on driver for adapters with BusLogic chips -ChangeLog +ChangeLog.1992-1997 - Changes to scsi files, if not listed elsewhere +ChangeLog.arcmsr + - Changes to driver for ARECA's SATA RAID controller cards ChangeLog.ips - IBM ServeRAID driver Changelog +ChangeLog.lpfc + - Changes to lpfc driver +ChangeLog.megaraid + - Changes to LSI megaraid controller. +ChangeLog.megaraid_sas + - Changes to serial attached scsi version of LSI megaraid controller. ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx - Changes to ncr53c8xx driver ChangeLog.sym53c8xx @@ -20,46 +26,78 @@ FlashPoint.txt - info on driver for BusLogic FlashPoint adapters LICENSE.FlashPoint - Licence of the Flashpoint driver +LICENSE.qla2xxx + - License for QLogic Linux Fibre Channel HBA Driver firmware. +LICENSE.qla4xxx + - License for QLogic Linux iSCSI HBA Driver. Mylex.txt - info on driver for Mylex adapters NinjaSCSI.txt - info on WorkBiT NinjaSCSI-32/32Bi driver +aacraid.txt + - Driver supporting Adaptec RAID controllers +advansys.txt + - List of Advansys Host Adapters aha152x.txt - info on driver for Adaptec AHA152x based adapters +aic79xx.txt + - Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI host adapters aic7xxx.txt - info on driver for Adaptec controllers -aic7xxx_old.txt - - info on driver for Adaptec controllers, old generation -cpqfc.txt - - info on driver for Compaq Tachyon TS adapters +arcmsr_spec.txt + - ARECA FIRMWARE SPEC (for IOP331 adapter) +bfa.txt + - Brocade FC/FCOE adapter driver. +bnx2fc.txt + - FCoE hardware offload for Broadcom network interfaces. +cxgb3i.txt + - Chelsio iSCSI Linux Driver +dc395x.txt + - README file for the dc395x SCSI driver dpti.txt - info on driver for DPT SmartRAID and Adaptec I2O RAID based adapters dtc3x80.txt - info on driver for DTC 2x80 based adapters g_NCR5380.txt - info on driver for NCR5380 and NCR53c400 based adapters -ibmmca.txt - - info on driver for IBM adapters with MCA bus +hpsa.txt + - HP Smart Array Controller SCSI driver. +hptiop.txt + - HIGHPOINT ROCKETRAID 3xxx RAID DRIVER in2000.txt - info on in2000 driver -ncr53c7xx.txt - - info on driver for NCR53c7xx based adapters +libsas.txt + - Serial Attached SCSI management layer. +link_power_management_policy.txt + - Link power management options. +lpfc.txt + - LPFC driver release notes +megaraid.txt + - Common Management Module, shared code handling ioctls for LSI drivers ncr53c8xx.txt - info on driver for NCR53c8xx based adapters +osd.txt + Object-Based Storage Device, command set introduction. osst.txt - info on driver for OnStream SC-x0 SCSI tape ppa.txt - info on driver for IOmega zip drive qlogicfas.txt - info on driver for QLogic FASxxx based adapters +scsi-changer.txt + - README for the SCSI media changer driver scsi-generic.txt - info on the sg driver for generic (non-disk/CD/tape) SCSI devices. +scsi-parameters.txt + - List of SCSI-parameters to pass to the kernel at module load-time. scsi.txt - short blurb on using SCSI support as a module. scsi_mid_low_api.txt - info on API between SCSI layer and low level drivers scsi_eh.txt - info on SCSI midlayer error handling infrastructure +scsi_fc_transport.txt + - SCSI Fiber Channel Tansport st.txt - info on scsi tape driver sym53c500_cs.txt @@ -68,3 +106,5 @@ sym53c8xx_2.txt - info on second generation driver for sym53c8xx based adapters tmscsim.txt - info on driver for AM53c974 based adapters +ufs.txt + - info on Universal Flash Storage(UFS) and UFS host controller driver. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/53c700.txt b/Documentation/scsi/53c700.txt index 0da681d497a..e31aceb6df1 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/53c700.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/53c700.txt @@ -16,32 +16,13 @@ fill in to get the driver working. Compile Time Flags ================== -The driver may be either io mapped or memory mapped. This is -selectable by configuration flags: - -CONFIG_53C700_MEM_MAPPED - -define if the driver is memory mapped. - -CONFIG_53C700_IO_MAPPED - -define if the driver is to be io mapped. - -One or other of the above flags *must* be defined. - -Other flags are: +A compile time flag is: CONFIG_53C700_LE_ON_BE define if the chipset must be supported in little endian mode on a big endian architecture (used for the 700 on parisc). -CONFIG_53C700_USE_CONSISTENT - -allocate consistent memory (should only be used if your architecture -has a mixture of consistent and inconsistent memory). Fully -consistent or fully inconsistent architectures should not define this. - Using the Chip Core Driver ========================== diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/BusLogic.txt b/Documentation/scsi/BusLogic.txt index 98023baa0f0..48e982cd6fe 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/BusLogic.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/BusLogic.txt @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ tune driver performance and error recovery to their particular needs. The latest information on Linux support for BusLogic SCSI Host Adapters, as well as the most recent release of this driver and the latest firmware for the BT-948/958/958D, will always be available from my Linux Home Page at URL -"http://www.dandelion.com/Linux/". +"http://sourceforge.net/projects/dandelion/". Bug reports should be sent via electronic mail to "lnz@dandelion.com". Please include with the bug report the complete configuration messages reported by the @@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ replacing "/usr/src" with wherever you keep your Linux kernel source tree: make config make zImage -Then install "arch/i386/boot/zImage" as your standard kernel, run lilo if +Then install "arch/x86/boot/zImage" as your standard kernel, run lilo if appropriate, and reboot. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.1992-1997 b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.1992-1997 index dc88ee2ab73..6faad7e6417 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.1992-1997 +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.1992-1997 @@ -1214,7 +1214,7 @@ Thu Jul 21 10:37:39 1994 Eric Youngdale (eric@esp22) * sr.c(sr_open): Do not allow opens with write access. -Mon Jul 18 09:51:22 1994 1994 Eric Youngdale (eric@esp22) +Mon Jul 18 09:51:22 1994 Eric Youngdale (eric@esp22) * Linux 1.1.31 released. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.arcmsr b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.arcmsr new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..038a3e6ecaa --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.arcmsr @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ +************************************************************************** +** History +** +** REV# DATE NAME DESCRIPTION +** 1.00.00.00 3/31/2004 Erich Chen First release +** 1.10.00.04 7/28/2004 Erich Chen modify for ioctl +** 1.10.00.06 8/28/2004 Erich Chen modify for 2.6.x +** 1.10.00.08 9/28/2004 Erich Chen modify for x86_64 +** 1.10.00.10 10/10/2004 Erich Chen bug fix for SMP & ioctl +** 1.20.00.00 11/29/2004 Erich Chen bug fix with arcmsr_bus_reset when PHY error +** 1.20.00.02 12/09/2004 Erich Chen bug fix with over 2T bytes RAID Volume +** 1.20.00.04 1/09/2005 Erich Chen fits for Debian linux kernel version 2.2.xx +** 1.20.00.05 2/20/2005 Erich Chen cleanly as look like a Linux driver at 2.6.x +** thanks for peoples kindness comment +** Kornel Wieliczek +** Christoph Hellwig +** Adrian Bunk +** Andrew Morton +** Christoph Hellwig +** James Bottomley +** Arjan van de Ven +** 1.20.00.06 3/12/2005 Erich Chen fix with arcmsr_pci_unmap_dma "unsigned long" cast, +** modify PCCB POOL allocated by "dma_alloc_coherent" +** (Kornel Wieliczek's comment) +** 1.20.00.07 3/23/2005 Erich Chen bug fix with arcmsr_scsi_host_template_init +** occur segmentation fault, +** if RAID adapter does not on PCI slot +** and modprobe/rmmod this driver twice. +** bug fix enormous stack usage (Adrian Bunk's comment) +** 1.20.00.08 6/23/2005 Erich Chen bug fix with abort command, +** in case of heavy loading when sata cable +** working on low quality connection +** 1.20.00.09 9/12/2005 Erich Chen bug fix with abort command handling, firmware version check +** and firmware update notify for hardware bug fix +** 1.20.00.10 9/23/2005 Erich Chen enhance sysfs function for change driver's max tag Q number. +** add DMA_64BIT_MASK for backward compatible with all 2.6.x +** add some useful message for abort command +** add ioctl code 'ARCMSR_IOCTL_FLUSH_ADAPTER_CACHE' +** customer can send this command for sync raid volume data +** 1.20.00.11 9/29/2005 Erich Chen by comment of Arjan van de Ven fix incorrect msleep redefine +** cast off sizeof(dma_addr_t) condition for 64bit pci_set_dma_mask +** 1.20.00.12 9/30/2005 Erich Chen bug fix with 64bit platform's ccbs using if over 4G system memory +** change 64bit pci_set_consistent_dma_mask into 32bit +** increcct adapter count if adapter initialize fail. +** miss edit at arcmsr_build_ccb.... +** psge += sizeof(struct _SG64ENTRY *) => +** psge += sizeof(struct _SG64ENTRY) +** 64 bits sg entry would be incorrectly calculated +** thanks Kornel Wieliczek give me kindly notify +** and detail description +** 1.20.00.13 11/15/2005 Erich Chen scheduling pending ccb with FIFO +** change the architecture of arcmsr command queue list +** for linux standard list +** enable usage of pci message signal interrupt +** follow Randy.Danlup kindness suggestion cleanup this code +** 1.20.00.14 05/02/2007 Erich Chen & Nick Cheng +** 1.implement PCI-Express error recovery function and AER capability +** 2.implement the selection of ARCMSR_MAX_XFER_SECTORS_B=4096 +** if firmware version is newer than 1.42 +** 3.modify arcmsr_iop_reset to improve the ability +** 4.modify the ISR, arcmsr_interrupt routine,to prevent the +** inconsistency with sg_mod driver if application directly calls +** the arcmsr driver w/o passing through scsi mid layer +** specially thanks to Yanmin Zhang's openhanded help about AER +** 1.20.00.15 08/30/2007 Erich Chen & Nick Cheng +** 1. support ARC1200/1201/1202 SATA RAID adapter, which is named +** ACB_ADAPTER_TYPE_B +** 2. modify the arcmsr_pci_slot_reset function +** 3. modify the arcmsr_pci_ers_disconnect_forepart function +** 4. modify the arcmsr_pci_ers_need_reset_forepart function +** 1.20.00.15 09/27/2007 Erich Chen & Nick Cheng +** 1. add arcmsr_enable_eoi_mode() on adapter Type B +** 2. add readl(reg->iop2drv_doorbell_reg) in arcmsr_handle_hbb_isr() +** in case of the doorbell interrupt clearance is cached +** 1.20.00.15 10/01/2007 Erich Chen & Nick Cheng +** 1. modify acb->devstate[i][j] +** as ARECA_RAID_GOOD instead of +** ARECA_RAID_GONE in arcmsr_alloc_ccb_pool +** 1.20.00.15 11/06/2007 Erich Chen & Nick Cheng +** 1. add conditional declaration for +** arcmsr_pci_error_detected() and +** arcmsr_pci_slot_reset +** 1.20.00.15 11/23/2007 Erich Chen & Nick Cheng +** 1.check if the sg list member number +** exceeds arcmsr default limit in arcmsr_build_ccb() +** 2.change the returned value type of arcmsr_build_ccb() +** from "void" to "int" +** 3.add the conditional check if arcmsr_build_ccb() +** returns FAILED +** 1.20.00.15 12/04/2007 Erich Chen & Nick Cheng +** 1. modify arcmsr_drain_donequeue() to ignore unknown +** command and let kernel process command timeout. +** This could handle IO request violating max. segments +** while Linux XFS over DM-CRYPT. +** Thanks to Milan Broz's comments <mbroz@redhat.com> +** 1.20.00.15 12/24/2007 Erich Chen & Nick Cheng +** 1.fix the portability problems +** 2.fix type B where we should _not_ iounmap() acb->pmu; +** it's not ioremapped. +** 3.add return -ENOMEM if ioremap() fails +** 4.transfer IS_SG64_ADDR w/ cpu_to_le32() +** in arcmsr_build_ccb +** 5. modify acb->devstate[i][j] as ARECA_RAID_GONE instead of +** ARECA_RAID_GOOD in arcmsr_alloc_ccb_pool() +** 6.fix arcmsr_cdb->Context as (unsigned long)arcmsr_cdb +** 7.add the checking state of +** (outbound_intstatus & ARCMSR_MU_OUTBOUND_HANDLE_INT) == 0 +** in arcmsr_handle_hba_isr +** 8.replace pci_alloc_consistent()/pci_free_consistent() with kmalloc()/kfree() in arcmsr_iop_message_xfer() +** 9. fix the release of dma memory for type B in arcmsr_free_ccb_pool() +** 10.fix the arcmsr_polling_hbb_ccbdone() +** 1.20.00.15 02/27/2008 Erich Chen & Nick Cheng +** 1.arcmsr_iop_message_xfer() is called from atomic context under the +** queuecommand scsi_host_template handler. James Bottomley pointed out +** that the current GFP_KERNEL|GFP_DMA flags are wrong: firstly we are in +** atomic context, secondly this memory is not used for DMA. +** Also removed some unneeded casts. Thanks to Daniel Drake <dsd@gentoo.org> +************************************************************************** diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc index ae3f962a7cf..2f6d595f95e 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Changes from 20041229 to 20050110 lpfc_scsiport.c * In remote port changes: no longer nulling target->pnode when removing from mapped list. Pnode get nulled when the node is - freed (after nodev tmo). This bug was causing i/o recieved in + freed (after nodev tmo). This bug was causing i/o received in the small window while the device was blocked to be errored w/ did_no_connect. With the fix, it returns host_busy (per the pre-remote port changes). @@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ Changes from 20041018 to 20041123 coherent mappings. Note: There are more consistent mappings that are using pci_dma_sync calls. Probably these should be removed as well. - * Modified lpfc_free_scsi_buf to accomodate all three scsi_buf + * Modified lpfc_free_scsi_buf to accommodate all three scsi_buf free types to alleviate miscellaneous panics with cable pull testing. * Set hotplug to default 0 and lpfc_target_remove to not remove @@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ Changes from 20041018 to 20041123 * Backround nodev_timeout processing to DPC This enables us to unblock (stop dev_loss_tmo) when appopriate. * Fix array discovery with multiple luns. The max_luns was 0 at - the time the host structure was intialized. lpfc_cfg_params + the time the host structure was initialized. lpfc_cfg_params then set the max_luns to the correct value afterwards. * Remove unused define LPFC_MAX_LUN and set the default value of lpfc_max_lun parameter to 512. @@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ Changes from 20041018 to 20041123 included more than once. * Replaced "set_current_state(TASK_UNINTERRUPTIBLE); schedule_timeout(timeout)" with "msleep(timeout)". - * Fixnode was loosing starget when rediscovered. We saw messages + * Fixnode was losing starget when rediscovered. We saw messages like: lpfc 0000:04:02.0: 0:0263 Cannot block scsi target as a result. Moved starget field into struct lpfc_target which is referenced from the node. @@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ Changes from 20041018 to 20041123 * Make 3 functions static: lpfc_get_hba_sym_node_name, lpfc_intr_prep and lpfc_setup_slim_access. Move lpfc_intr_prep and lpfc_setup_slim_access so they're defined before being used. - * Remove an unecessary list_del() in lpfc_hbadisc.c. + * Remove an unnecessary list_del() in lpfc_hbadisc.c. * Set nlp_state before calling lpfc_nlp_list() since this will potentially call fc_target_unblock which may cause a race in queuecommand by releasing host_lock. @@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ Changes from 20040920 to 20041018 * Integrate patches from Christoph Hellwig: two new helpers common to lpfc_sli_resume_iocb and lpfc_sli_issue_iocb - singificant cleanup of those two functions - the unused SLI_IOCB_USE_TXQ is - gone - lpfc_sli_issue_iocb_wait loses it's flags argument + gone - lpfc_sli_issue_iocb_wait loses its flags argument totally. * Fix in lpfc_sli.c: we can not store a 5 bit value in a 4-bit field. @@ -733,7 +733,7 @@ Changes from 20040920 to 20041018 I/O completion path a little more, especially taking care of fast-pathing the non-error case. Also removes tons of dead members and defines from lpfc_scsi.h - e.g. lpfc_target is down - to nothing more then the lpfc_nodelist pointer. + to nothing more than the lpfc_nodelist pointer. * Added binary sysfs file to issue mbox commands * Replaced #if __BIG_ENDIAN with #if __BIG_ENDIAN_BITFIELD for compatibility with the user space applications. @@ -753,7 +753,7 @@ Changes from 20040908 to 20040920 * Changed version number to 8.0.12 * Removed used #defines: DEFAULT_PCI_LATENCY_CLOCKS and PCI_LATENCY_VALUE from lpfc_hw.h. - * Changes to accomodate rnid. + * Changes to accommodate rnid. * Fix RSCN handling so RSCN NS queries only effect NPorts found in RSCN data. * If we rcv a plogi on a NPort queued up for discovery, clear the @@ -807,13 +807,13 @@ Changes from 20040908 to 20040920 lpfc_disc_done/lpfc_do_dpc cleanup - lpfc_disc_done can return void - move lpfc_do_dpc and lpfc_disc_done to lpfc_hbadisc.c - remove checking of list emptiness before calling lpfc_disc_done, - it handles the emtpy list case just fine and the additional + it handles the empty list case just fine and the additional instructions cost less then the bustlocked spinlock operations. * Integrated patch from Christoph Hellwig: This adds a new 64bit counter instead, brd_no isn't reused anymore. Also some tiny whitespace cleanups in surrounding code. * Reorder functions in lpfc_els.c to remove need for prototypes. - * Removed unsed prototypes from lpfc_crtn.h - + * Removed unused prototypes from lpfc_crtn.h - lpfc_ip_timeout_handler, lpfc_read_pci and lpfc_revoke. * Removed some unused prototypes from lpfc_crtn.h - lpfc_scsi_hba_reset, lpfc_scsi_issue_inqsn, @@ -863,7 +863,7 @@ Changes from 20040823 to 20040908 * Minimal support for SCSI flat space addressing/volume set addressing. Use 16 bits of LUN address so that flat addressing/VSA will work. - * Changed 2 occurences of if( 1 != f(x)) to if(f(x) != 1) + * Changed 2 occurrences of if( 1 != f(x)) to if(f(x) != 1) * Drop include of lpfc_cfgparm.h. * Reduce stack usage of lpfc_fdmi_cmd in lpfc_ct.c. * Add minimum range checking property to /sys write/store @@ -989,8 +989,8 @@ Changes from 20040709 to 20040716 * Remove redundant port_cmp != 2 check in if (!port_cmp) { .... if (port_cmp != 2).... } * Clock changes: removed struct clk_data and timerList. - * Clock changes: seperate nodev_tmo and els_retry_delay into 2 - seperate timers and convert to 1 argument changed + * Clock changes: separate nodev_tmo and els_retry_delay into 2 + separate timers and convert to 1 argument changed LPFC_NODE_FARP_PEND_t to struct lpfc_node_farp_pend convert ipfarp_tmo to 1 argument convert target struct tmofunc and rtplunfunc to 1 argument * cr_count, cr_delay and @@ -1028,7 +1028,7 @@ Changes from 20040614 to 20040709 * Remove the need for buf_tmo. * Changed ULP_BDE64 to struct ulp_bde64. * Changed ULP_BDE to struct ulp_bde. - * Cleanup lpfc_os_return_scsi_cmd() and it's call path. + * Cleanup lpfc_os_return_scsi_cmd() and its call path. * Removed lpfc_no_device_delay. * Consolidating lpfc_hba_put_event() into lpfc_put_event(). * Removed following attributes and their functionality: @@ -1449,7 +1449,7 @@ Changes from 20040402 to 20040409 * Removed lpfc_els_chk_latt from the lpfc_config_post function. lpfc_els_chk_latt will enable the link event interrupts when flogi is pending which causes two discovery state machines - running parallely. + running parallelly. * Add pci_disable_device to unload path. * Move lpfc_sleep_event from lpfc_fcp.c to lpfc_util_ioctl.c * Call dma_map_single() & pci_map_single() directly instead of via @@ -1514,7 +1514,7 @@ Changes from 20040402 to 20040409 * Remove unused elxclock declaration in elx_sli.h. * Since everywhere IOCB_ENTRY is used, the return value is cast, move the cast into the macro. - * Split ioctls out into seperate files + * Split ioctls out into separate files Changes from 20040326 to 20040402 @@ -1534,7 +1534,7 @@ Changes from 20040326 to 20040402 * Unused variable cleanup * Use Linux list macros for DMABUF_t * Break up ioctls into 3 sections, dfc, util, hbaapi - rearranged code so this could be easily seperated into a + rearranged code so this could be easily separated into a differnet module later All 3 are currently turned on by defines in lpfc_ioctl.c LPFC_DFC_IOCTL, LPFC_UTIL_IOCTL, LPFC_HBAAPI_IOCTL @@ -1551,7 +1551,7 @@ Changes from 20040326 to 20040402 started by lpfc_online(). lpfc_offline() only stopped els_timeout routine. It now stops all timeout routines associated with that hba. - * Replace seperate next and prev pointers in struct + * Replace separate next and prev pointers in struct lpfc_bindlist with list_head type. In elxHBA_t, replace fc_nlpbind_start and _end with fc_nlpbind_list and use list_head macros to access it. @@ -1590,7 +1590,7 @@ Changes from 20040326 to 20040402 ELX_WRITE_HS ELX_WRITE_HA ELX_WRITE_CA ELX_READ_HC ELX_READ_HS ELX_READ_HA ELX_READ_CA ELX_READ_MB ELX_RESET ELX_READ_HBA ELX_INSTANCE ELX_LIP. Also introduced - attribute "set" to be used in conjuction with the above + attribute "set" to be used in conjunction with the above attributes. * Removed DLINK, enque and deque declarations now that clock doesn't use them anymore @@ -1718,7 +1718,7 @@ Changes from 20040319 to 20040326 * lpfc_els_timeout_handler() now uses system timer. * Further cleanup of #ifdef powerpc * lpfc_scsi_timeout_handler() now uses system timer. - * Replace common driver's own defines for endianess w/ Linux's + * Replace common driver's own defines for endianness w/ Linux's __BIG_ENDIAN etc. * Added #ifdef IPFC for all IPFC specific code. * lpfc_disc_retry_rptlun() now uses system timer. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid index 09f6300eda4..d2052fdbedd 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid @@ -1,10 +1,174 @@ +Release Date : Thu Nov 16 15:32:35 EST 2006 - + Sumant Patro <sumant.patro@lsi.com> +Current Version : 2.20.5.1 (scsi module), 2.20.2.6 (cmm module) +Older Version : 2.20.4.9 (scsi module), 2.20.2.6 (cmm module) + +1. Changes in Initialization to fix kdump failure. + Send SYNC command on loading. + This command clears the pending commands in the adapter + and re-initialize its internal RAID structure. + Without this change, megaraid driver either panics or fails to + initialize the adapter during kdump's second kernel boot + if there are pending commands or interrupts from other devices + sharing the same IRQ. +2. Authors email-id domain name changed from lsil.com to lsi.com. + Also modified the MODULE_AUTHOR to megaraidlinux@lsi.com + +Release Date : Fri May 19 09:31:45 EST 2006 - Seokmann Ju <sju@lsil.com> +Current Version : 2.20.4.9 (scsi module), 2.20.2.6 (cmm module) +Older Version : 2.20.4.8 (scsi module), 2.20.2.6 (cmm module) + +1. Fixed a bug in megaraid_init_mbox(). + Customer reported "garbage in file on x86_64 platform". + Root Cause: the driver registered controllers as 64-bit DMA capable + for those which are not support it. + Fix: Made change in the function inserting identification machanism + identifying 64-bit DMA capable controllers. + + > -----Original Message----- + > From: Vasily Averin [mailto:vvs@sw.ru] + > Sent: Thursday, May 04, 2006 2:49 PM + > To: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org; Kolli, Neela; Mukker, Atul; + > Ju, Seokmann; Bagalkote, Sreenivas; + > James.Bottomley@SteelEye.com; devel@openvz.org + > Subject: megaraid_mbox: garbage in file + > + > Hello all, + > + > I've investigated customers claim on the unstable work of + > their node and found a + > strange effect: reading from some files leads to the + > "attempt to access beyond end of device" messages. + > + > I've checked filesystem, memory on the node, motherboard BIOS + > version, but it + > does not help and issue still has been reproduced by simple + > file reading. + > + > Reproducer is simple: + > + > echo 0xffffffff >/proc/sys/dev/scsi/logging_level ; + > cat /vz/private/101/root/etc/ld.so.cache >/tmp/ttt ; + > echo 0 >/proc/sys/dev/scsi/logging + > + > It leads to the following messages in dmesg + > + > sd_init_command: disk=sda, block=871769260, count=26 + > sda : block=871769260 + > sda : reading 26/26 512 byte blocks. + > scsi_add_timer: scmd: f79ed980, time: 7500, (c02b1420) + > sd 0:1:0:0: send 0xf79ed980 sd 0:1:0:0: + > command: Read (10): 28 00 33 f6 24 ac 00 00 1a 00 + > buffer = 0xf7cfb540, bufflen = 13312, done = 0xc0366b40, + > queuecommand 0xc0344010 + > leaving scsi_dispatch_cmnd() + > scsi_delete_timer: scmd: f79ed980, rtn: 1 + > sd 0:1:0:0: done 0xf79ed980 SUCCESS 0 sd 0:1:0:0: + > command: Read (10): 28 00 33 f6 24 ac 00 00 1a 00 + > scsi host busy 1 failed 0 + > sd 0:1:0:0: Notifying upper driver of completion (result 0) + > sd_rw_intr: sda: res=0x0 + > 26 sectors total, 13312 bytes done. + > use_sg is 4 + > attempt to access beyond end of device + > sda6: rw=0, want=1044134458, limit=951401367 + > Buffer I/O error on device sda6, logical block 522067228 + > attempt to access beyond end of device + +2. When INQUIRY with EVPD bit set issued to the MegaRAID controller, + system memory gets corrupted. + Root Cause: MegaRAID F/W handle the INQUIRY with EVPD bit set + incorrectly. + Fix: MegaRAID F/W has fixed the problem and being process of release, + soon. Meanwhile, driver will filter out the request. + +3. One of member in the data structure of the driver leads unaligne + issue on 64-bit platform. + Customer reporeted "kernel unaligned access addrss" issue when + application communicates with MegaRAID HBA driver. + Root Cause: in uioc_t structure, one of member had misaligned and it + led system to display the error message. + Fix: A patch submitted to community from following folk. + + > -----Original Message----- + > From: linux-scsi-owner@vger.kernel.org + > [mailto:linux-scsi-owner@vger.kernel.org] On Behalf Of Sakurai Hiroomi + > Sent: Wednesday, July 12, 2006 4:20 AM + > To: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org; linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org + > Subject: Re: Help: strange messages from kernel on IA64 platform + > + > Hi, + > + > I saw same message. + > + > When GAM(Global Array Manager) is started, The following + > message output. + > kernel: kernel unaligned access to 0xe0000001fe1080d4, + > ip=0xa000000200053371 + > + > The uioc structure used by ioctl is defined by packed, + > the allignment of each member are disturbed. + > In a 64 bit structure, the allignment of member doesn't fit 64 bit + > boundary. this causes this messages. + > In a 32 bit structure, we don't see the message because the allinment + > of member fit 32 bit boundary even if packed is specified. + > + > patch + > I Add 32 bit dummy member to fit 64 bit boundary. I tested. + > We confirmed this patch fix the problem by IA64 server. + > + > ************************************************************** + > **************** + > --- linux-2.6.9/drivers/scsi/megaraid/megaraid_ioctl.h.orig + > 2006-04-03 17:13:03.000000000 +0900 + > +++ linux-2.6.9/drivers/scsi/megaraid/megaraid_ioctl.h + > 2006-04-03 17:14:09.000000000 +0900 + > @@ -132,6 +132,10 @@ + > /* Driver Data: */ + > void __user * user_data; + > uint32_t user_data_len; + > + + > + /* 64bit alignment */ + > + uint32_t pad_0xBC; + > + + > mraid_passthru_t __user *user_pthru; + > + > mraid_passthru_t *pthru32; + > ************************************************************** + > **************** + +Release Date : Mon Apr 11 12:27:22 EST 2006 - Seokmann Ju <sju@lsil.com> +Current Version : 2.20.4.8 (scsi module), 2.20.2.6 (cmm module) +Older Version : 2.20.4.7 (scsi module), 2.20.2.6 (cmm module) + +1. Fixed a bug in megaraid_reset_handler(). + Customer reported "Unable to handle kernel NULL pointer dereference + at virtual address 00000000" when system goes to reset condition + for some reason. It happened randomly. + Root Cause: in the megaraid_reset_handler(), there is possibility not + returning pending packets in the pend_list if there are multiple + pending packets. + Fix: Made the change in the driver so that it will return all packets + in the pend_list. + +2. Added change request. + As found in the following URL, rmb() only didn't help the + problem. I had to increase the loop counter to 0xFFFFFF. (6 F's) + http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-scsi&m=110971060502497&w=2 + + I attached a patch for your reference, too. + Could you check and get this fix in your driver? + + Best Regards, + Jun'ichi Nomura + Release Date : Fri Nov 11 12:27:22 EST 2005 - Seokmann Ju <sju@lsil.com> Current Version : 2.20.4.7 (scsi module), 2.20.2.6 (cmm module) Older Version : 2.20.4.6 (scsi module), 2.20.2.6 (cmm module) 1. Sorted out PCI IDs to remove megaraid support overlaps. Based on the patch from Daniel, sorted out PCI IDs along with - charactor node name change from 'megadev' to 'megadev_legacy' to avoid + character node name change from 'megadev' to 'megadev_legacy' to avoid conflict. --- Hopefully we'll be getting the build restriction zapped much sooner, @@ -51,7 +215,7 @@ Older Version : 2.20.4.5 (scsi module), 2.20.2.5 (cmm module) 3. Convert pci_module_init to pci_register_driver Convert from pci_module_init to pci_register_driver - (from:http://kerneljanitors.org/TODO) + (from:http://kernelnewbies.org/KernelJanitors/TODO) - Signed-off-by: Domen Puncer <domen@coderock.org> 4. Use the pre defined DMA mask constants from dma-mapping.h @@ -245,7 +409,7 @@ i. Function reordering so that inline functions are defined before they megaraid_mbox_prepare_pthru, megaraid_mbox_prepare_epthru, megaraid_busywait_mbox - - Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>, 08.19.2004 + - Andrew Morton, 08.19.2004 linux-scsi mailing list "Something else to clean up after inclusion: every instance of an @@ -307,13 +471,13 @@ vi. Add support for 64-bit applications. Current drivers assume only vii. Move the function declarations for the management module from megaraid_mm.h to megaraid_mm.c - - Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>, 08.19.2004 + - Andrew Morton, 08.19.2004 linux-scsi mailing list viii. Change default values for MEGARAID_NEWGEN, MEGARAID_MM, and MEGARAID_MAILBOX to 'n' in Kconfig.megaraid - - Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>, 08.19.2004 + - Andrew Morton, 08.19.2004 linux-scsi mailing list ix. replace udelay with msleep @@ -350,7 +514,7 @@ iv. Remove yield() while mailbox handshake in synchronous commands v. Remove redundant __megaraid_busywait_mbox routine -vi. Fix bug in the managment module, which causes a system lockup when the +vi. Fix bug in the management module, which causes a system lockup when the IO module is loaded and then unloaded, followed by executing any management utility. The current version of management module does not handle the adapter unregister properly. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas index f8c16cbf56b..91ba58ef02d 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas @@ -1,3 +1,606 @@ +Release Date : Mon. Mar 10, 2014 17:00:00 PST 2014 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford + Kashyap Desai + Sumit Saxena +Current Version : 06.803.01.00-rc1 +Old Version : 06.700.06.00-rc1 + 1. Load correct raid context timeout value for multipathing & clustering. + 2. Fix megasas_ioc_init_fusion to use local stack variable. + 3. Return leaked MPT frames to MPT command pool. + 4. Add Dell PowerEdge VRTX SR-IOV VF device support. + 5. Version and Changelog update. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Release Date : Sat. Aug 31, 2013 17:00:00 PST 2013 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford + Kashyap Desai + Sumit Saxena +Current Version : 06.700.06.00-rc1 +Old Version : 06.600.18.00-rc1 + 1. Add High Availability clustering support using shared Logical Disks. + 2. Version and Changelog update. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Release Date : Wed. May 15, 2013 17:00:00 PST 2013 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford + Kashyap Desai + Sumit Saxena +Current Version : 06.600.18.00-rc1 +Old Version : 06.506.00.00-rc1 + 1. Return DID_ERROR for scsi io, when controller is in critical h/w error. + 2. Fix the interrupt mask for Gen2 controller. + 3. Update balance count in driver to be in sync of firmware. + 4. Free event detail memory without device ID check. + 5. Set IO request timeout value provided by OS timeout for Tape devices. + 6. Add support for MegaRAID Fury (device ID-0x005f) 12Gb/s controllers. + 7. Add support to display Customer branding details in syslog. + 8. Set IoFlags to enable Fast Path for JBODs for Invader/Fury(12 Gb/s) + controllers. + 9. Add support for Extended MSI-x vectors for Invader and Fury(12Gb/s + HBA). + 10.Add support for Uneven Span PRL11. + 11.Add support to differentiate between iMR and MR Firmware. + 12.Version and Changelog update. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Release Date : Sat. Feb 9, 2013 17:00:00 PST 2013 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 06.506.00.00-rc1 +Old Version : 06.504.01.00-rc1 + 1. Add 4k FastPath DIF support. + 2. Dont load DevHandle unless FastPath enabled. + 3. Version and Changelog update. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Release Date : Mon. Oct 1, 2012 17:00:00 PST 2012 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 06.504.01.00-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.06.18-rc1 + 1. Removed un-needed completion_lock spinlock calls. + 2. Add module param for configurable MSI-X vector count. + 3. Load io_request DataLength in bytes. + 4. Add array boundary check for SystemPD. + 5. Add SystemPD FastPath support. + 6. Remove duplicate code. + 7. Version, Changelog, Copyright update. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Release Date : Tue. Jun 17, 2012 17:00:00 PST 2012 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford/Kashyap Desai +Current Version : 00.00.06.18-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.06.15-rc1 + 1. Fix Copyright dates. + 2. Add throttlequeuedepth module parameter. + 3. Add resetwaittime module parameter. + 4. Move poll_aen_lock initializer. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Release Date : Mon. Mar 19, 2012 17:00:00 PST 2012 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.06.15-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.06.14-rc1 + 1. Optimize HostMSIxVectors setting. + 2. Add fpRead/WriteCapable, fpRead/WriteAcrossStripe checks. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Release Date : Fri. Jan 6, 2012 17:00:00 PST 2010 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.06.14-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.06.12-rc1 + 1. Fix reglockFlags for degraded raid5/6 for MR 9360/9380. + 2. Mask off flags in ioctl path to prevent memory scribble with older + MegaCLI versions. + 3. Remove poll_mode_io module paramater, sysfs node, and associated code. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Release Date : Wed. Oct 5, 2011 17:00:00 PST 2010 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.06.12-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.05.40-rc1 + 1. Continue booting immediately if FW in FAULT at driver load time. + 2. Increase default cmds per lun to 256. + 3. Fix mismatch in megasas_reset_fusion() mutex lock-unlock. + 4. Remove some un-necessary code. + 5. Clear state change interrupts for Fusion/Invader. + 6. Clear FUSION_IN_RESET before enabling interrupts. + 7. Add support for MegaRAID 9360/9380 12GB/s controllers. + 8. Add multiple MSI-X vector/multiple reply queue support. + 9. Add driver workaround for PERC5/1068 kdump kernel panic. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Release Date : Tue. Jul 26, 2011 17:00:00 PST 2010 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.05.40-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.05.38-rc1 + 1. Fix FastPath I/O to work with degraded RAID 1. + 2. Add .change_queue_depth support. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Release Date : Wed. May 11, 2011 17:00:00 PST 2010 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.05.38-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.05.34-rc1 + 1. Remove MSI-X black list, use MFI_REG_STATE.ready.msiEnable. + 2. Remove un-used function megasas_return_cmd_for_smid(). + 3. Check MFI_REG_STATE.fault.resetAdapter in megasas_reset_fusion(). + 4. Disable interrupts/free_irq() in megasas_shutdown(). + 5. Fix bug where AENs could be lost in probe() and resume(). + 6. Convert 6,10,12 byte CDB's to 16 byte CDB for large LBA's for FastPath + IO. + 7. Add 1078 OCR support. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Release Date : Thu. Feb 24, 2011 17:00:00 PST 2010 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.05.34-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.05.29-rc1 + 1. Fix some failure gotos from megasas_probe_one(), etc. + 2. Add missing check_and_restore_queue_depth() call in + complete_cmd_fusion(). + 3. Enable MSI-X before calling megasas_init_fw(). + 4. Call tasklet_schedule() even if outbound_intr_status == 0 for MFI based + boards in MSI-X mode. + 5. Fix megasas_probe_one() to clear PCI_MSIX_FLAGS_ENABLE in msi control + register in kdump kernel. + 6. Fix megasas_get_cmd() to only print "Command pool empty" if + megasas_dbg_lvl is set. + 7. Fix megasas_build_dcdb_fusion() to not filter by TYPE_DISK. + 8. Fix megasas_build_dcdb_fusion() to use io_request->LUN[1] field. + 9. Add MR_EVT_CFG_CLEARED to megasas_aen_polling(). + 10. Fix tasklet_init() in megasas_init_fw() to use instancet->tasklet. + 11. Fix fault state handling in megasas_transition_to_ready(). + 12. Fix max_sectors setting for IEEE SGL's. + 13. Fix iMR OCR support to work correctly. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Release Date : Tues. Dec 14, 2010 17:00:00 PST 2010 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.05.29-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.04.31-rc1 + 1. Rename megaraid_sas.c to megaraid_sas_base.c. + 2. Update GPL headers. + 3. Add MSI-X support and 'msix_disable' module parameter. + 4. Use lowest memory bar (for SR-IOV VF support). + 5. Add struct megasas_instance_temlate changes, and change all code to use + new instance entries: + + irqreturn_t (*service_isr )(int irq, void *devp); + void (*tasklet)(unsigned long); + u32 (*init_adapter)(struct megasas_instance *); + u32 (*build_and_issue_cmd) (struct megasas_instance *, + struct scsi_cmnd *); + void (*issue_dcmd) (struct megasas_instance *instance, + struct megasas_cmd *cmd); + + 6. Add code to support MegaRAID 9265/9285 controllers device id (0x5b). +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +1 Release Date : Thur. May 03, 2010 09:12:45 PST 2009 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.04.31-rc1 +3 Older Version : 00.00.04.17.1-rc1 + +1. Add the Online Controller Reset (OCR) to the Driver. + OCR is the new feature for megaraid_sas driver which + will allow the fw to do the chip reset which will not + affact the OS behavious. + + To add the OCR support, driver need to do: + a). reset the controller chips -- Xscale and Gen2 which + will change the function calls and add the reset function + related to this two chips. + + b). during the reset, driver will store the pending cmds + which not returned by FW to driver's pending queue. Driver + will re-issue those pending cmds again to FW after the OCR + finished. + + c). In driver's timeout routine, driver will report to + OS as reset. Also driver's queue routine will block the + cmds until the OCR finished. + + d). in Driver's ISR routine, if driver get the FW state as + state change, FW in Failure status and FW support online controller + reset (OCR), driver will start to do the controller reset. + + e). In driver's IOCTL routine, the application cmds will wait for the + OCR to finish, then issue the cmds to FW. + + f). Before driver kill adapter, driver will do last chance of + OCR to see if driver can bring back the FW. + +2. Add the support update flag to the driver to tell LSI megaraid_sas + application which driver will support the device update. So application + will not need to do the device update after application add/del the device + from the system. +3. In driver's timeout routine, driver will do three time reset if fw is in + failed state. Driver will kill adapter if can't bring back FW after the + this three times reset. +4. Add the input parameter max_sectors to 1MB support to our GEN2 controller. + customer can use the input paramenter max_sectors to add 1MB support to GEN2 + controller. + +1 Release Date : Thur. Oct 29, 2009 09:12:45 PST 2009 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.04.17.1-rc1 +3 Older Version : 00.00.04.12 + +1. Add the pad_0 in mfi frame structure to 0 to fix the + context value larger than 32bit value issue. + +2. Add the logic drive list to the driver. Driver will + keep the logic drive list internal after driver load. + +3. driver fixed the device update issue after get the AEN + PD delete/ADD, LD add/delete from FW. + +1 Release Date : Tues. July 28, 2009 10:12:45 PST 2009 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.04.12 +3 Older Version : 00.00.04.10 + +1. Change the AEN sys PD update from scsi_scan to + scsi_add_device and scsi_remove_device. +2. Takeoff the debug print-out in aen_polling routine. + +1 Release Date : Thur. July 02, 2009 10:12:45 PST 2009 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.04.10 +3 Older Version : 00.00.04.08 + +1. Add the 3 mins timeout during the controller initialize. +2. Add the fix for 64bit sense date errors. + +1 Release Date : Tues. May 05, 2009 10:12:45 PST 2009 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.04.08 +3 Older Version : 00.00.04.06 + +1. Add the fix of pending in FW after deleted the logic drives. +2. Add the fix of deallocating memory after get pdlist. + +1 Release Date : Tues. March 26, 2009 10:12:45 PST 2009 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.04.06 +3 Older Version : 00.00.04.04 + +1. Add the fix of the driver cmd empty fix of the driver cmd empty. +2. Add the fix of the driver MSM AEN CMD cause the system slow. + +1 Release Date : Tues. March 03, 2009 10:12:45 PST 2009 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.04.04 +3 Older Version : 00.00.04.01 + +1. Add the Tape drive fix to the driver: If the command is for + the tape device, set the pthru timeout to the os layer timeout value. + +2. Add Poll_wait mechanism to Gen-2 Linux driv. + In the aen handler, driver needs to wakeup poll handler similar to + the way it raises SIGIO. + +3. Add new controller new SAS2 support to the driver. + +4. Report the unconfigured PD (system PD) to OS. + +5. Add the IEEE SGL support to the driver + +6. Reasign the Application cmds to SAS2 controller + +1 Release Date : Thur.July. 24 11:41:51 PST 2008 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.04.01 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.22 + +1. Add the new controller (0078, 0079) support to the driver + Those controllers are LSI's next generatation(gen2) SAS controllers. + +1 Release Date : Mon.June. 23 10:12:45 PST 2008 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.22 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.20 + +1. Add shutdown DCMD cmd to the shutdown routine to make FW shutdown proper. +2. Unexpected interrupt occurs in HWR Linux driver, add the dumy readl pci flush will fix this issue. + +1 Release Date : Mon. March 10 11:02:31 PDT 2008 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.20-RC1 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.16 + +1. Rollback the sense info implementation + Sense buffer ptr data type in the ioctl path is reverted back + to u32 * as in previous versions of driver. + +2. Fixed the driver frame count. + When Driver sent wrong frame count to firmware. As this + particular command is sent to drive, FW is seeing continuous + chip resets and so the command will timeout. + +3. Add the new controller(1078DE) support to the driver + and Increase the max_wait to 60 from 10 in the controller + operational status. With this max_wait increase, driver will + make sure the FW will finish the pending cmd for KDUMP case. + +1 Release Date : Thur. Nov. 07 16:30:43 PST 2007 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.16 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.15 + +1. Increased MFI_POLL_TIMEOUT_SECS to 60 seconds from 10. FW may take + a max of 60 seconds to respond to the INIT cmd. + +1 Release Date : Fri. Sep. 07 16:30:43 PST 2007 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.15 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.14 + +1. Added module parameter "poll_mode_io" to support for "polling" + (reduced interrupt operation). In this mode, IO completion + interrupts are delayed. At the end of initiating IOs, the + driver schedules for cmd completion if there are pending cmds + to be completed. A timer-based interrupt has also been added + to prevent IO completion processing from being delayed + indefinitely in the case that no new IOs are initiated. + +1 Release Date : Fri. Sep. 07 16:30:43 PST 2007 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.14 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.13 + +1. Setting the max_sectors_per_req based on max SGL supported by the + FW. Prior versions calculated this value from controller info + (max_sectors_1, max_sectors_2). For certain controllers/FW, + this was resulting in a value greater than max SGL supported + by the FW. Issue was first reported by users running LUKS+XFS + with megaraid_sas. Thanks to RB for providing the logs and + duplication steps that helped to get to the root cause of the + issue. 2. Increased MFI_POLL_TIMEOUT_SECS to 60 seconds from + 10. FW may take a max of 60 seconds to respond to the INIT + cmd. + +1 Release Date : Fri. June. 15 16:30:43 PST 2007 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.13 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.12 + +1. Added the megasas_reset_timer routine to intercept cmd timeout and throttle io. + +On Fri, 2007-03-16 at 16:44 -0600, James Bottomley wrote: +It looks like megaraid_sas at least needs this to throttle its commands +> as they begin to time out. The code keeps the existing transport +> template use of eh_timed_out (and allows the transport to override the +> host if they both have this callback). +> +> James + +1 Release Date : Sat May. 12 16:30:43 PST 2007 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.12 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.11 + +1. When MegaSAS driver receives reset call from OS, driver waits in reset +routine for max 3 minutes for all pending command completion. Now driver will +call completion routine every 5 seconds from the reset routine instead of +waiting for depending on cmd completion from isr path. + +1 Release Date : Mon Apr. 30 10:25:52 PST 2007 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.11 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.09 + + 1. Memory Manager for IOCTL removed for 2.6 kernels. + pci_alloc_consistent replaced by dma_alloc_coherent. With this + change there is no need of memory manager in the driver code + + On Wed, 2007-02-07 at 13:30 -0800, Andrew Morton wrote: + > I suspect all this horror is due to stupidity in the DMA API. + > + > pci_alloc_consistent() just goes and assumes GFP_ATOMIC, whereas + > the caller (megasas_mgmt_fw_ioctl) would have been perfectly happy + > to use GFP_KERNEL. + > + > I bet this fixes it + + It does, but the DMA API was expanded to cope with this exact case, so + use dma_alloc_coherent() directly in the megaraid code instead. The dev + is just &pci_dev->dev. + + James <James.Bottomley@SteelEye.com> + + 3. SYNCHRONIZE_CACHE is not supported by FW and thus blocked by driver. + 4. Hibernation support added + 5. Performing diskdump while running IO in RHEL 4 was failing. Fixed. + +1 Release Date : Fri Feb. 09 14:36:28 PST 2007 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.09 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.08 + +i. Under heavy IO mid-layer prints "DRIVER_TIMEOUT" errors + + The driver now waits for 10 seconds to elapse instead of 5 (as in + previous release) to resume IO. + +1 Release Date : Mon Feb. 05 11:35:24 PST 2007 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.08 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.07 + +i. Under heavy IO mid-layer prints "DRIVER_TIMEOUT" errors + + Fix: The driver is now throttling IO. + Checks added in megasas_queue_command to know if FW is able to + process commands within timeout period. If number of retries + is 2 or greater,the driver stops sending cmd to FW temporarily. IO is + resumed if pending cmd count reduces to 16 or 5 seconds has elapsed + from the time cmds were last sent to FW. + +ii. FW enables WCE bit in Mode Sense cmd for drives that are configured + as WriteBack. The OS may send "SYNCHRONIZE_CACHE" cmd when Logical + Disks are exposed with WCE=1. User is advised to enable Write Back + mode only when the controller has battery backup. At this time + Synhronize cache is not supported by the FW. Driver will short-cycle + the cmd and return success without sending down to FW. + +1 Release Date : Sun Jan. 14 11:21:32 PDT 2007 - + Sumant Patro <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com>/Bo Yang +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.07 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.06 + +i. bios_param entry added in scsi_host_template that returns disk geometry + information. + +1 Release Date : Fri Oct 20 11:21:32 PDT 2006 - Sumant Patro <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com>/Bo Yang +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.06 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.05 + +1. Added new memory management module to support the IOCTL memory allocation. For IOCTL we try to allocate from the memory pool created during driver initialization. If mem pool is empty then we allocate at run time. +2. Added check in megasas_queue_command and dpc/isr routine to see if we have already declared adapter dead + (hw_crit_error=1). If hw_crit_error==1, now we donot accept any processing of pending cmds/accept any cmd from OS + +1 Release Date : Mon Oct 02 11:21:32 PDT 2006 - Sumant Patro <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com> +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.05 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.04 + +i. PCI_DEVICE macro used + + Convert the pci_device_id-table of the megaraid_sas-driver to the PCI_DEVICE-macro, to safe some lines. + + - Henrik Kretzschmar <henne@nachtwindheim.de> +ii. All compiler warnings removed +iii. megasas_ctrl_info struct reverted to 3.02 release +iv. Default value of megasas_dbg_lvl set to 0 +v. Removing in megasas_exit the sysfs entry created for megasas_dbg_lvl +vi. In megasas_teardown_frame_pool(), cmd->frame was passed instead of + cmd->sense to pci_pool_free. Fixed. Bug was pointed out by + Eric Sesterhenn + +1 Release Date : Wed Sep 13 14:22:51 PDT 2006 - Sumant Patro <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com> +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.04 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.03 + +i. Added Reboot notify +ii. Reduced by 1 max cmds sent to FW from Driver to make the reply_q_sz same + as Max Cmds FW can support + +1 Release Date : Tue Aug 22 16:33:14 PDT 2006 - Sumant Patro <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com> +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.03 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.02 + +i. Send stop adapter to FW & Dump pending FW cmds before declaring adapter dead. + New varible added to set dbg level. +ii. Disable interrupt made as fn pointer as they are different for 1068 / 1078 +iii. Frame count optimization. Main frame can contain 2 SGE for 64 bit SGLs and + 3 SGE for 32 bit SGL +iv. Tasklet added for cmd completion +v. If FW in operational state before firing INIT, now we send RESET Flag to FW instead of just READY. This is used to do soft reset. +vi. megasas_ctrl_prop structure updated (based on FW struct) +vii. Added print : FW now in Ready State during initialization + +1 Release Date : Sun Aug 06 22:49:52 PDT 2006 - Sumant Patro <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com> +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.02 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.01 + +i. Added FW tranistion state for Hotplug scenario + +1 Release Date : Sun May 14 22:49:52 PDT 2006 - Sumant Patro <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com> +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.01 +3 Older Version : 00.00.02.04 + +i. Added support for ZCR controller. + + New device id 0x413 added. + +ii. Bug fix : Disable controller interrupt before firing INIT cmd to FW. + + Interrupt is enabled after required initialization is over. + This is done to ensure that driver is ready to handle interrupts when + it is generated by the controller. + + -Sumant Patro <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com> + +1 Release Date : Wed Feb 03 14:31:44 PST 2006 - Sumant Patro <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com> +2 Current Version : 00.00.02.04 +3 Older Version : 00.00.02.04 + +i. Remove superflous instance_lock + + gets rid of the otherwise superflous instance_lock and avoids an unsave + unsynchronized access in the error handler. + + - Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de> + + +1 Release Date : Wed Feb 03 14:31:44 PST 2006 - Sumant Patro <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com> +2 Current Version : 00.00.02.04 +3 Older Version : 00.00.02.04 + +i. Support for 1078 type (ppc IOP) controller, device id : 0x60 added. + During initialization, depending on the device id, the template members + are initialized with function pointers specific to the ppc or + xscale controllers. + + -Sumant Patro <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com> + +1 Release Date : Fri Feb 03 14:16:25 PST 2006 - Sumant Patro + <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com> +2 Current Version : 00.00.02.04 +3 Older Version : 00.00.02.02 +i. Register 16 byte CDB capability with scsi midlayer + + "This patch properly registers the 16 byte command length capability of the + megaraid_sas controlled hardware with the scsi midlayer. All megaraid_sas + hardware supports 16 byte CDB's." + + -Joshua Giles <joshua_giles@dell.com> + 1 Release Date : Mon Jan 23 14:09:01 PST 2006 - Sumant Patro <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com> 2 Current Version : 00.00.02.02 3 Older Version : 00.00.02.01 diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx index 7d03e9d5b5f..9288e3d8974 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Sun Sep 24 21:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) Wed Jul 26 23:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) * version ncr53c8xx-3.4.1 - - Provide OpenFirmare path through the proc FS on PPC. + - Provide OpenFirmware path through the proc FS on PPC. - Remove trailing argument #2 from a couple of #undefs. Sun Jul 09 16:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) @@ -195,12 +195,12 @@ Sun Feb 14:00 1999 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) Pointed out by Leonard Zubkoff. - Allow to tune request_irq() flags from the boot command line using ncr53c8xx=irqm:??, as follows: - a) If bit 0x10 is set in irqm, SA_SHIRQ flag is not used. - b) If bit 0x20 is set in irqm, SA_INTERRUPT flag is not used. - By default the driver uses both SA_SHIRQ and SA_INTERRUPT. + a) If bit 0x10 is set in irqm, IRQF_SHARED flag is not used. + b) If bit 0x20 is set in irqm, IRQF_DISABLED flag is not used. + By default the driver uses both IRQF_SHARED and IRQF_DISABLED. Option 'ncr53c8xx=irqm:0x20' may be used when an IRQ is shared by a 53C8XX adapter and a network board. - - Tiny mispelling fixed (ABORT instead of ABRT). Was fortunately + - Tiny misspelling fixed (ABORT instead of ABRT). Was fortunately harmless. - Negotiate SYNC data transfers with CCS devices. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx index ef985ec348e..c1933707d0b 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Sun Sep 24 21:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) Wed Jul 26 23:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) * version sym53c8xx-1.7.1 - - Provide OpenFirmare path through the proc FS on PPC. + - Provide OpenFirmware path through the proc FS on PPC. - Download of on-chip SRAM using memcpy_toio() doesn't work on PPC. Restore previous method (MEMORY MOVE from SCRIPTS). - Remove trailing argument #2 from a couple of #undefs. @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Fri Jan 1 20:00 1999 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) Sat Dec 19 21:00 1998 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) * version sym53c8xx-1.0 - Define some new IO registers for the 896 (istat1, mbox0, mbox1) - - Revamp slighly the Symbios NVRAM lay-out based on the excerpt of + - Revamp slightly the Symbios NVRAM lay-out based on the excerpt of the header file I received from Symbios. - Check the PCI bus number for the boot order (Using a fast PCI controller behing a PCI-PCI bridge seems sub-optimal). diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/FlashPoint.txt b/Documentation/scsi/FlashPoint.txt index d5acaa300a4..5b5f29cb9f8 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/FlashPoint.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/FlashPoint.txt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ operating system support to its BusLogic brand of FlashPoint Ultra SCSI host adapters. All of BusLogic's other SCSI host adapters, including the MultiMaster line, currently support the Linux operating system. Linux drivers and information will be available on October 15th at -http://www.dandelion.com/Linux/. +http://sourceforge.net/projects/dandelion/. "Mylex is committed to supporting the Linux community," says Peter Shambora, vice president of marketing for Mylex. "We have supported Linux driver @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Linux is a freely-distributed implementation of UNIX for Intel x86, Sun SPARC, SGI MIPS, Motorola 68k, Digital Alpha AXP and Motorola PowerPC machines. It supports a wide range of software, including the X Window System, Emacs, and TCP/IP networking. Further information is available at -http://www.linux.org and http://www.ssc.com/linux. +http://www.linux.org and http://www.ssc.com/. FlashPoint Host Adapters @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ peters@mylex.com Ever since its introduction last October, the BusLogic FlashPoint LT has been problematic for members of the Linux community, in that no Linux -drivers have been available for this new Ultra SCSI product. Despite it's +drivers have been available for this new Ultra SCSI product. Despite its officially being positioned as a desktop workstation product, and not being particularly well suited for a high performance multitasking operating system like Linux, the FlashPoint LT has been touted by computer system diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx index 9e15b4f9cd2..52f0b435923 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx +++ b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx @@ -1,45 +1,290 @@ -Copyright (c) 2003-2005 QLogic Corporation -QLogic Linux Fibre Channel HBA Driver +Copyright (c) 2003-2014 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux FC-FCoE Driver -This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be -distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file. +This program includes a device driver for Linux 3.x. You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the -GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software -Foundation (version 2 or a later version). - -You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file -under the following terms: - - 1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable), - must retain the above copyright notice, this list of - conditions and the following disclaimer. - - 2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above - copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other - materials provided with the distribution. - - 3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to - endorse or promote products derived from this software - without specific prior written permission - -REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE, -THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY -EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE -IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A -PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR -BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, -EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED -TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, -DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON -ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, -OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY -OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE -POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. - -USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT -CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR -OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, -TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN -ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN -COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. +GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as +Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). + + + +EXHIBIT A + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fcc27ad27d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx @@ -0,0 +1,289 @@ +Copyright (c) 2003-2013 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux iSCSI Driver + +This program includes a device driver for Linux 3.x. +You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the +GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as +Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). + + +EXHIBIT A + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/Mylex.txt b/Documentation/scsi/Mylex.txt index cdf69293f7d..3797f3e6c2b 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/Mylex.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/Mylex.txt @@ -2,4 +2,4 @@ Please see the file README.BusLogic for information about Linux support for Mylex (formerly BusLogic) MultiMaster and FlashPoint SCSI Host Adapters. The Mylex DAC960 PCI RAID Controllers are now supported. Please consult -http://www.dandelion.com/Linux/ for further information on the DAC960 driver. +http://sourceforge.net/projects/dandelion for further information on the DAC960 driver. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/NinjaSCSI.txt b/Documentation/scsi/NinjaSCSI.txt index 041780f428a..ac8db8ceec7 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/NinjaSCSI.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/NinjaSCSI.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ 1. Comment This is Workbit corp.'s(http://www.workbit.co.jp/) NinjaSCSI-3 -(http://www.workbit.co.jp/ts/z_nj3r.html) and NinjaSCSI-32Bi -(http://www.workbit.co.jp/ts/z_njsc32bi.html) PCMCIA card driver module for Linux. 2. My Linux environment @@ -24,7 +22,7 @@ SCSI device: I-O data CDPS-PX24 (CD-ROM drive) You can also use "cardctl" program (this program is in pcmcia-cs source code) to get more info. -# cat /var/log/messgaes +# cat /var/log/messages ... Jan 2 03:45:06 lindberg cardmgr[78]: unsupported card in socket 1 Jan 2 03:45:06 lindberg cardmgr[78]: product info: "WBT", "NinjaSCSI-3", "R1.0" @@ -36,18 +34,18 @@ Socket 1: product info: "IO DATA", "CBSC16 ", "1" -[2] Get Linux kernel source, and extract it to /usr/src. - Because NinjaSCSI driver requiers some SCSI header files in Linux kernel - source. - I recomend rebuilding your kernel. This eliminate some versioning problem. +[2] Get the Linux kernel source, and extract it to /usr/src. + Because the NinjaSCSI driver requires some SCSI header files in Linux + kernel source, I recommend rebuilding your kernel; this eliminates + some versioning problems. $ cd /usr/src $ tar -zxvf linux-x.x.x.tar.gz $ cd linux $ make config ... -[3] If you use this driver with Kernel 2.2, Unpack pcmcia-cs in some directory - and make & install. This driver requies pcmcia-cs header file. +[3] If you use this driver with Kernel 2.2, unpack pcmcia-cs in some directory + and make & install. This driver requires the pcmcia-cs header file. $ cd /usr/src $ tar zxvf cs-pcmcia-cs-3.x.x.tar.gz ... @@ -59,10 +57,10 @@ $ emacs Makefile ... $ make -[5] Copy nsp_cs.o to suitable plase, like /lib/modules/<Kernel version>/pcmcia/ . +[5] Copy nsp_cs.ko to suitable place, like /lib/modules/<Kernel version>/pcmcia/ . [6] Add these lines to /etc/pcmcia/config . - If you yse pcmcia-cs-3.1.8 or later, we can use "nsp_cs.conf" file. + If you use pcmcia-cs-3.1.8 or later, we can use "nsp_cs.conf" file. So, you don't need to edit file. Just copy to /etc/pcmcia/ . ------------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aacraid.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aacraid.txt index 820fd079350..30f643f611b 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/aacraid.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/aacraid.txt @@ -4,53 +4,77 @@ Introduction ------------------------- The aacraid driver adds support for Adaptec (http://www.adaptec.com) RAID controllers. This is a major rewrite from the original -Adaptec supplied driver. It has signficantly cleaned up both the code +Adaptec supplied driver. It has significantly cleaned up both the code and the running binary size (the module is less than half the size of the original). Supported Cards/Chipsets ------------------------- PCI ID (pci.ids) OEM Product - 9005:0285:9005:028a Adaptec 2020ZCR (Skyhawk) - 9005:0285:9005:028e Adaptec 2020SA (Skyhawk) - 9005:0285:9005:028b Adaptec 2025ZCR (Terminator) - 9005:0285:9005:028f Adaptec 2025SA (Terminator) - 9005:0285:9005:0286 Adaptec 2120S (Crusader) - 9005:0286:9005:028d Adaptec 2130S (Lancer) 9005:0285:9005:0285 Adaptec 2200S (Vulcan) + 9005:0285:9005:0286 Adaptec 2120S (Crusader) 9005:0285:9005:0287 Adaptec 2200S (Vulcan-2m) + 9005:0285:9005:0288 Adaptec 3230S (Harrier) + 9005:0285:9005:0289 Adaptec 3240S (Tornado) + 9005:0285:9005:028a Adaptec 2020ZCR (Skyhawk) + 9005:0285:9005:028b Adaptec 2025ZCR (Terminator) 9005:0286:9005:028c Adaptec 2230S (Lancer) 9005:0286:9005:028c Adaptec 2230SLP (Lancer) - 9005:0285:9005:0296 Adaptec 2240S (SabreExpress) + 9005:0286:9005:028d Adaptec 2130S (Lancer) + 9005:0285:9005:028e Adaptec 2020SA (Skyhawk) + 9005:0285:9005:028f Adaptec 2025SA (Terminator) 9005:0285:9005:0290 Adaptec 2410SA (Jaguar) - 9005:0285:9005:0293 Adaptec 21610SA (Corsair-16) - 9005:0285:103c:3227 Adaptec 2610SA (Bearcat) + 9005:0285:103c:3227 Adaptec 2610SA (Bearcat HP release) + 9005:0285:9005:0293 Adaptec 21610SA (Corsair-16) + 9005:0285:9005:0296 Adaptec 2240S (SabreExpress) 9005:0285:9005:0292 Adaptec 2810SA (Corsair-8) - 9005:0285:9005:0294 Adaptec Prowler - 9005:0286:9005:029d Adaptec 2420SA (Intruder) - 9005:0286:9005:029c Adaptec 2620SA (Intruder) - 9005:0286:9005:029b Adaptec 2820SA (Intruder) - 9005:0286:9005:02a7 Adaptec 2830SA (Skyray) - 9005:0286:9005:02a8 Adaptec 2430SA (Skyray) - 9005:0285:9005:0288 Adaptec 3230S (Harrier) - 9005:0285:9005:0289 Adaptec 3240S (Tornado) - 9005:0285:9005:0298 Adaptec 4000SAS (BlackBird) - 9005:0285:9005:0297 Adaptec 4005SAS (AvonPark) + 9005:0285:9005:0297 Adaptec 4005 (AvonPark) + 9005:0285:9005:0298 Adaptec 4000 (BlackBird) 9005:0285:9005:0299 Adaptec 4800SAS (Marauder-X) 9005:0285:9005:029a Adaptec 4805SAS (Marauder-E) - 9005:0286:9005:02a2 Adaptec 4810SAS (Hurricane) + 9005:0286:9005:029b Adaptec 2820SA (Intruder) + 9005:0286:9005:029c Adaptec 2620SA (Intruder) + 9005:0286:9005:029d Adaptec 2420SA (Intruder HP release) + 9005:0286:9005:02ac Adaptec 1800 (Typhoon44) + 9005:0285:9005:02b5 Adaptec 5445 (Voodoo44) + 9005:0285:15d9:02b5 SMC AOC-USAS-S4i + 9005:0285:9005:02b6 Adaptec 5805 (Voodoo80) + 9005:0285:15d9:02b6 SMC AOC-USAS-S8i + 9005:0285:9005:02b7 Adaptec 5085 (Voodoo08) + 9005:0285:9005:02bb Adaptec 3405 (Marauder40LP) + 9005:0285:9005:02bc Adaptec 3805 (Marauder80LP) + 9005:0285:9005:02c7 Adaptec 3085 (Marauder08ELP) + 9005:0285:9005:02bd Adaptec 31205 (Marauder120) + 9005:0285:9005:02be Adaptec 31605 (Marauder160) + 9005:0285:9005:02c3 Adaptec 51205 (Voodoo120) + 9005:0285:9005:02c4 Adaptec 51605 (Voodoo160) + 9005:0285:15d9:02c9 SMC AOC-USAS-S4iR + 9005:0285:15d9:02ca SMC AOC-USAS-S8iR + 9005:0285:9005:02ce Adaptec 51245 (Voodoo124) + 9005:0285:9005:02cf Adaptec 51645 (Voodoo164) + 9005:0285:9005:02d0 Adaptec 52445 (Voodoo244) + 9005:0285:9005:02d1 Adaptec 5405 (Voodoo40) + 9005:0285:15d9:02d2 SMC AOC-USAS-S8i-LP + 9005:0285:15d9:02d3 SMC AOC-USAS-S8iR-LP + 9005:0285:9005:02d4 Adaptec ASR-2045 (Voodoo04 Lite) + 9005:0285:9005:02d5 Adaptec ASR-2405 (Voodoo40 Lite) + 9005:0285:9005:02d6 Adaptec ASR-2445 (Voodoo44 Lite) + 9005:0285:9005:02d7 Adaptec ASR-2805 (Voodoo80 Lite) + 9005:0285:9005:02d8 Adaptec 5405Z (Voodoo40 BLBU) + 9005:0285:9005:02d9 Adaptec 5445Z (Voodoo44 BLBU) + 9005:0285:9005:02da Adaptec 5805Z (Voodoo80 BLBU) 1011:0046:9005:0364 Adaptec 5400S (Mustang) 1011:0046:9005:0365 Adaptec 5400S (Mustang) - 9005:0283:9005:0283 Adaptec Catapult (3210S with arc firmware) - 9005:0284:9005:0284 Adaptec Tomcat (3410S with arc firmware) 9005:0287:9005:0800 Adaptec Themisto (Jupiter) 9005:0200:9005:0200 Adaptec Themisto (Jupiter) 9005:0286:9005:0800 Adaptec Callisto (Jupiter) 1011:0046:9005:1364 Dell PERC 2/QC (Quad Channel, Mustang) + 1011:0046:9005:1365 Dell PERC 2/QC (Quad Channel, Mustang) 1028:0001:1028:0001 Dell PERC 2/Si (Iguana) 1028:0003:1028:0003 Dell PERC 3/Si (SlimFast) 1028:0002:1028:0002 Dell PERC 3/Di (Opal) - 1028:0004:1028:0004 Dell PERC 3/DiF (Iguana) + 1028:0004:1028:0004 Dell PERC 3/SiF (Iguana) + 1028:0004:1028:00d0 Dell PERC 3/DiF (Iguana) 1028:0002:1028:00d1 Dell PERC 3/DiV (Viper) 1028:0002:1028:00d9 Dell PERC 3/DiL (Lexus) 1028:000a:1028:0106 Dell PERC 3/DiJ (Jaguar) @@ -63,23 +87,40 @@ Supported Cards/Chipsets 9005:0285:17aa:0287 Legend S230 (Vulcan) 9005:0285:9005:0290 IBM ServeRAID 7t (Jaguar) 9005:0285:1014:02F2 IBM ServeRAID 8i (AvonPark) - 9005:0285:1014:0312 IBM ServeRAID 8i (AvonParkLite) - 9005:0286:1014:9580 IBM ServeRAID 8k/8k-l8 (Aurora) 9005:0286:1014:9540 IBM ServeRAID 8k/8k-l4 (AuroraLite) - 9005:0286:9005:029f ICP ICP9014R0 (Lancer) - 9005:0286:9005:029e ICP ICP9024R0 (Lancer) + 9005:0286:1014:9580 IBM ServeRAID 8k/8k-l8 (Aurora) + 9005:0285:1014:034d IBM ServeRAID 8s (Marauder-E) + 9005:0286:9005:029e ICP ICP9024RO (Lancer) + 9005:0286:9005:029f ICP ICP9014RO (Lancer) 9005:0286:9005:02a0 ICP ICP9047MA (Lancer) 9005:0286:9005:02a1 ICP ICP9087MA (Lancer) - 9005:0286:9005:02a4 ICP ICP9085LI (Marauder-X) - 9005:0286:9005:02a5 ICP ICP5085BR (Marauder-E) - 9005:0286:9005:02a3 ICP ICP5085AU (Hurricane) + 9005:0285:9005:02a4 ICP ICP9085LI (Marauder-X) + 9005:0285:9005:02a5 ICP ICP5085BR (Marauder-E) 9005:0286:9005:02a6 ICP ICP9067MA (Intruder-6) - 9005:0286:9005:02a9 ICP ICP5087AU (Skyray) - 9005:0286:9005:02aa ICP ICP5047AU (Skyray) + 9005:0285:9005:02b2 ICP (Voodoo 8 internal 8 external) + 9005:0285:9005:02b8 ICP ICP5445SL (Voodoo44) + 9005:0285:9005:02b9 ICP ICP5085SL (Voodoo80) + 9005:0285:9005:02ba ICP ICP5805SL (Voodoo08) + 9005:0285:9005:02bf ICP ICP5045BL (Marauder40LP) + 9005:0285:9005:02c0 ICP ICP5085BL (Marauder80LP) + 9005:0285:9005:02c8 ICP ICP5805BL (Marauder08ELP) + 9005:0285:9005:02c1 ICP ICP5125BR (Marauder120) + 9005:0285:9005:02c2 ICP ICP5165BR (Marauder160) + 9005:0285:9005:02c5 ICP ICP5125SL (Voodoo120) + 9005:0285:9005:02c6 ICP ICP5165SL (Voodoo160) + 9005:0286:9005:02ab (Typhoon40) + 9005:0286:9005:02ad (Aurora ARK) + 9005:0286:9005:02ae (Aurora Lite ARK) + 9005:0285:9005:02b0 (Sunrise Lake ARK) + 9005:0285:9005:02b1 Adaptec (Voodoo 8 internal 8 external) + 9005:0285:108e:7aac SUN STK RAID REM (Voodoo44 Coyote) + 9005:0285:108e:0286 SUN STK RAID INT (Cougar) + 9005:0285:108e:0287 SUN STK RAID EXT (Prometheus) + 9005:0285:108e:7aae SUN STK RAID EM (Narvi) People ------------------------- -Alan Cox <alan@redhat.com> +Alan Cox <alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk> Christoph Hellwig <hch@infradead.org> (updates for new-style PCI probing and SCSI host registration, small cleanups/fixes) Matt Domsch <matt_domsch@dell.com> (revision ioctl, adapter messages) @@ -91,6 +132,7 @@ Deanna Bonds (non-DASD support, PAE fibs and 64 bit, where fibs that go to the hardware are consistently called hw_fibs and not just fibs like the name of the driver tracking structure) Mark Salyzyn <Mark_Salyzyn@adaptec.com> Fixed panic issues and added some new product ids for upcoming hbas. Performance tuning, card failover and bug mitigations. +Achim Leubner <Achim_Leubner@adaptec.com> Original Driver ------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/advansys.txt b/Documentation/scsi/advansys.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4a3db62b742 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/advansys.txt @@ -0,0 +1,243 @@ +AdvanSys (Advanced System Products, Inc.) manufactures the following +RISC-based, Bus-Mastering, Fast (10 Mhz) and Ultra (20 Mhz) Narrow +(8-bit transfer) SCSI Host Adapters for the ISA, EISA, VL, and PCI +buses and RISC-based, Bus-Mastering, Ultra (20 Mhz) Wide (16-bit +transfer) SCSI Host Adapters for the PCI bus. + +The CDB counts below indicate the number of SCSI CDB (Command +Descriptor Block) requests that can be stored in the RISC chip +cache and board LRAM. A CDB is a single SCSI command. The driver +detect routine will display the number of CDBs available for each +adapter detected. The number of CDBs used by the driver can be +lowered in the BIOS by changing the 'Host Queue Size' adapter setting. + +Laptop Products: + ABP-480 - Bus-Master CardBus (16 CDB) + +Connectivity Products: + ABP510/5150 - Bus-Master ISA (240 CDB) + ABP5140 - Bus-Master ISA PnP (16 CDB) + ABP5142 - Bus-Master ISA PnP with floppy (16 CDB) + ABP902/3902 - Bus-Master PCI (16 CDB) + ABP3905 - Bus-Master PCI (16 CDB) + ABP915 - Bus-Master PCI (16 CDB) + ABP920 - Bus-Master PCI (16 CDB) + ABP3922 - Bus-Master PCI (16 CDB) + ABP3925 - Bus-Master PCI (16 CDB) + ABP930 - Bus-Master PCI (16 CDB) + ABP930U - Bus-Master PCI Ultra (16 CDB) + ABP930UA - Bus-Master PCI Ultra (16 CDB) + ABP960 - Bus-Master PCI MAC/PC (16 CDB) + ABP960U - Bus-Master PCI MAC/PC Ultra (16 CDB) + +Single Channel Products: + ABP542 - Bus-Master ISA with floppy (240 CDB) + ABP742 - Bus-Master EISA (240 CDB) + ABP842 - Bus-Master VL (240 CDB) + ABP940 - Bus-Master PCI (240 CDB) + ABP940U - Bus-Master PCI Ultra (240 CDB) + ABP940UA/3940UA - Bus-Master PCI Ultra (240 CDB) + ABP970 - Bus-Master PCI MAC/PC (240 CDB) + ABP970U - Bus-Master PCI MAC/PC Ultra (240 CDB) + ABP3960UA - Bus-Master PCI MAC/PC Ultra (240 CDB) + ABP940UW/3940UW - Bus-Master PCI Ultra-Wide (253 CDB) + ABP970UW - Bus-Master PCI MAC/PC Ultra-Wide (253 CDB) + ABP3940U2W - Bus-Master PCI LVD/Ultra2-Wide (253 CDB) + +Multi-Channel Products: + ABP752 - Dual Channel Bus-Master EISA (240 CDB Per Channel) + ABP852 - Dual Channel Bus-Master VL (240 CDB Per Channel) + ABP950 - Dual Channel Bus-Master PCI (240 CDB Per Channel) + ABP950UW - Dual Channel Bus-Master PCI Ultra-Wide (253 CDB Per Channel) + ABP980 - Four Channel Bus-Master PCI (240 CDB Per Channel) + ABP980U - Four Channel Bus-Master PCI Ultra (240 CDB Per Channel) + ABP980UA/3980UA - Four Channel Bus-Master PCI Ultra (16 CDB Per Chan.) + ABP3950U2W - Bus-Master PCI LVD/Ultra2-Wide and Ultra-Wide (253 CDB) + ABP3950U3W - Bus-Master PCI Dual LVD2/Ultra3-Wide (253 CDB) + +Driver Compile Time Options and Debugging + +The following constants can be defined in the source file. + +1. ADVANSYS_ASSERT - Enable driver assertions (Def: Enabled) + + Enabling this option adds assertion logic statements to the + driver. If an assertion fails a message will be displayed to + the console, but the system will continue to operate. Any + assertions encountered should be reported to the person + responsible for the driver. Assertion statements may proactively + detect problems with the driver and facilitate fixing these + problems. Enabling assertions will add a small overhead to the + execution of the driver. + +2. ADVANSYS_DEBUG - Enable driver debugging (Def: Disabled) + + Enabling this option adds tracing functions to the driver and the + ability to set a driver tracing level at boot time. This option is + very useful for debugging the driver, but it will add to the size + of the driver execution image and add overhead to the execution of + the driver. + + The amount of debugging output can be controlled with the global + variable 'asc_dbglvl'. The higher the number the more output. By + default the debug level is 0. + + If the driver is loaded at boot time and the LILO Driver Option + is included in the system, the debug level can be changed by + specifying a 5th (ASC_NUM_IOPORT_PROBE + 1) I/O Port. The + first three hex digits of the pseudo I/O Port must be set to + 'deb' and the fourth hex digit specifies the debug level: 0 - F. + The following command line will look for an adapter at 0x330 + and set the debug level to 2. + + linux advansys=0x330,0,0,0,0xdeb2 + + If the driver is built as a loadable module this variable can be + defined when the driver is loaded. The following insmod command + will set the debug level to one. + + insmod advansys.o asc_dbglvl=1 + + Debugging Message Levels: + 0: Errors Only + 1: High-Level Tracing + 2-N: Verbose Tracing + + To enable debug output to console, please make sure that: + + a. System and kernel logging is enabled (syslogd, klogd running). + b. Kernel messages are routed to console output. Check + /etc/syslog.conf for an entry similar to this: + + kern.* /dev/console + + c. klogd is started with the appropriate -c parameter + (e.g. klogd -c 8) + + This will cause printk() messages to be be displayed on the + current console. Refer to the klogd(8) and syslogd(8) man pages + for details. + + Alternatively you can enable printk() to console with this + program. However, this is not the 'official' way to do this. + Debug output is logged in /var/log/messages. + + main() + { + syscall(103, 7, 0, 0); + } + + Increasing LOG_BUF_LEN in kernel/printk.c to something like + 40960 allows more debug messages to be buffered in the kernel + and written to the console or log file. + +3. ADVANSYS_STATS - Enable statistics (Def: Enabled) + + Enabling this option adds statistics collection and display + through /proc to the driver. The information is useful for + monitoring driver and device performance. It will add to the + size of the driver execution image and add minor overhead to + the execution of the driver. + + Statistics are maintained on a per adapter basis. Driver entry + point call counts and transfer size counts are maintained. + Statistics are only available for kernels greater than or equal + to v1.3.0 with the CONFIG_PROC_FS (/proc) file system configured. + + AdvanSys SCSI adapter files have the following path name format: + + /proc/scsi/advansys/{0,1,2,3,...} + + This information can be displayed with cat. For example: + + cat /proc/scsi/advansys/0 + + When ADVANSYS_STATS is not defined the AdvanSys /proc files only + contain adapter and device configuration information. + +Driver LILO Option + +If init/main.c is modified as described in the 'Directions for Adding +the AdvanSys Driver to Linux' section (B.4.) above, the driver will +recognize the 'advansys' LILO command line and /etc/lilo.conf option. +This option can be used to either disable I/O port scanning or to limit +scanning to 1 - 4 I/O ports. Regardless of the option setting EISA and +PCI boards will still be searched for and detected. This option only +affects searching for ISA and VL boards. + +Examples: + 1. Eliminate I/O port scanning: + boot: linux advansys= + or + boot: linux advansys=0x0 + 2. Limit I/O port scanning to one I/O port: + boot: linux advansys=0x110 + 3. Limit I/O port scanning to four I/O ports: + boot: linux advansys=0x110,0x210,0x230,0x330 + +For a loadable module the same effect can be achieved by setting +the 'asc_iopflag' variable and 'asc_ioport' array when loading +the driver, e.g. + + insmod advansys.o asc_iopflag=1 asc_ioport=0x110,0x330 + +If ADVANSYS_DEBUG is defined a 5th (ASC_NUM_IOPORT_PROBE + 1) +I/O Port may be added to specify the driver debug level. Refer to +the 'Driver Compile Time Options and Debugging' section above for +more information. + +Credits (Chronological Order) + +Bob Frey <bfrey@turbolinux.com.cn> wrote the AdvanSys SCSI driver +and maintained it up to 3.3F. He continues to answer questions +and help maintain the driver. + +Nathan Hartwell <mage@cdc3.cdc.net> provided the directions and +basis for the Linux v1.3.X changes which were included in the +1.2 release. + +Thomas E Zerucha <zerucha@shell.portal.com> pointed out a bug +in advansys_biosparam() which was fixed in the 1.3 release. + +Erik Ratcliffe <erik@caldera.com> has done testing of the +AdvanSys driver in the Caldera releases. + +Rik van Riel <H.H.vanRiel@fys.ruu.nl> provided a patch to +AscWaitTixISRDone() which he found necessary to make the +driver work with a SCSI-1 disk. + +Mark Moran <mmoran@mmoran.com> has helped test Ultra-Wide +support in the 3.1A driver. + +Doug Gilbert <dgilbert@interlog.com> has made changes and +suggestions to improve the driver and done a lot of testing. + +Ken Mort <ken@mort.net> reported a DEBUG compile bug fixed +in 3.2K. + +Tom Rini <trini@kernel.crashing.org> provided the CONFIG_ISA +patch and helped with PowerPC wide and narrow board support. + +Philip Blundell <philb@gnu.org> provided an +advansys_interrupts_enabled patch. + +Dave Jones <dave@denial.force9.co.uk> reported the compiler +warnings generated when CONFIG_PROC_FS was not defined in +the 3.2M driver. + +Jerry Quinn <jlquinn@us.ibm.com> fixed PowerPC support (endian +problems) for wide cards. + +Bryan Henderson <bryanh@giraffe-data.com> helped debug narrow +card error handling. + +Manuel Veloso <veloso@pobox.com> worked hard on PowerPC narrow +board support and fixed a bug in AscGetEEPConfig(). + +Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo <acme@conectiva.com.br> made +save_flags/restore_flags changes. + +Andy Kellner <AKellner@connectcom.net> continued the Advansys SCSI +driver development for ConnectCom (Version > 3.3F). + +Ken Witherow for extensive testing during the development of version 3.4. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aha152x.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aha152x.txt index 2ce022cec9b..94848734ac6 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/aha152x.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/aha152x.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ $Id: README.aha152x,v 1.2 1999/12/25 15:32:30 fischer Exp fischer $ Adaptec AHA-1520/1522 SCSI driver for Linux (aha152x) -Copyright 1993-1999 Jürgen Fischer <fischer@norbit.de> +Copyright 1993-1999 Jürgen Fischer <fischer@norbit.de> TC1550 patches by Luuk van Dijk (ldz@xs4all.nl) @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ in the partition table and therefore every operating system has to know the right geometry to be able to interpret it. Moreover there are certain limitations to the C/H/S addressing scheme, -namely the address space is limited to upto 255 heads, upto 63 sectors +namely the address space is limited to up to 255 heads, up to 63 sectors and a maximum of 1023 cylinders. The AHA-1522 BIOS calculates the geometry by fixing the number of heads diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt index 382b439b439..e2d3273000d 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: an SDTR with an offset of 0 to be sure the target knows we are async. This works around a firmware defect in the Quantum Atlas 10K. - - Implement controller susupend and resume. + - Implement controller suspend and resume. - Clear PCI error state during driver attach so that we don't disable memory mapped I/O due to a stray write by some other driver probe that occurred before we @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: - Add support for scsi_report_device_reset() found in 2.5.X kernels. - Add 7901B support. - - Simplify handling of the packtized lun Rev A workaround. + - Simplify handling of the packetized lun Rev A workaround. - Correct and simplify handling of the ignore wide residue message. The previous code would fail to report a residual if the transaction data length was even and we received @@ -120,14 +120,14 @@ The following information is available in this file: list size to avoid SCSI malloc pool fragmentation. - Cleanup channel display in our /proc output. - Workaround duplicate device entries in the mid-layer - devlice list during add-single-device. + device list during add-single-device. 1.3.6 (March 28th, 2003) - Correct a double free in the Domain Validation code. - Correct a reference to free'ed memory during controller shutdown. - Reset the bus on an SE->LVD change. This is required - to reset our transcievers. + to reset our transceivers. 1.3.5 (March 24th, 2003) - Fix a few register window mode bugs. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: 1.3.0 (January 21st, 2003) - Full regression testing for all U320 products completed. - Added abort and target/lun reset error recovery handler and - interrupt coalessing. + interrupt coalescing. 1.2.0 (November 14th, 2002) - Added support for Domain Validation @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: - Packetized SCSI Protocol at 160MB/s and 320MB/s - Quick Arbitration Selection (QAS) - Retained Training Information (Rev B. ASIC only) - - Interrupt Coalessing + - Interrupt Coalescing - Initiator Mode (target mode not currently supported) - Support for the PCI-X standard up to 133MHz @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: INCORRECTLY CAN RENDER YOUR SYSTEM INOPERABLE. USE THEM WITH CAUTION. - Edit the file "modprobe.conf" in the directory /etc and add/edit a + Put a .conf file in the /etc/modprobe.d/ directory and add/edit a line containing 'options aic79xx aic79xx=[command[,command...]]' where 'command' is one or more of the following: ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: Option: tag_info:{{value[,value...]}[,{value[,value...]}...]} Definition: Set the per-target tagged queue depth on a per controller basis. Both controllers and targets - may be ommitted indicating that they should retain + may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default tag depth. Examples: tag_info:{{16,32,32,64,8,8,,32,32,32,32,32,32,32,32,32} On Controller 0 @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: The rd_strm_bitmask is a 16 bit hex value in which each bit represents a target. Setting the target's bit to '1' enables read streaming for that - target. Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + target. Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default read streaming setting. Example: rd_strm:{0x0041} On Controller 0 @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: ----------------------------------------------------------------- Option: dv: {value[,value...]} Definition: Set Domain Validation Policy on a per-controller basis. - Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default read streaming setting. Example: dv:{-1,0,,1,1,0} On Controller 0 leave DV at its default setting. @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: Option: precomp: {value[,value...]} Definition: Set IO Cell precompensation value on a per-controller basis. - Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default precompensation setting. Example: precomp:{0x1} On Controller 0 set precompensation to 1. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: ----------------------------------------------------------------- Option: slewrate: {value[,value...]} Definition: Set IO Cell slew rate on a per-controller basis. - Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default slew rate setting. Example: slewrate:{0x1} On Controller 0 set slew rate to 1. @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: ----------------------------------------------------------------- Option: amplitude: {value[,value...]} Definition: Set IO Cell signal amplitude on a per-controller basis. - Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default read streaming setting. Example: amplitude:{0x1} On Controller 0 set amplitude to 1. @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: http://www.adaptec.com/buy-cables/. Europe - - Visit our Web site at http://www.adaptec-europe.com/. + - Visit our Web site at http://www.adaptec.com/en-US/_common/world_index. - To speak with a Technical Support Specialist, call, or email, * German: +49 89 4366 5522, Monday-Friday, 9:00-17:00 CET, http://ask-de.adaptec.com/. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx.txt index 3481fcded4c..7c5d0223d44 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx.txt @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: 2. Multi-function Twin Channel Device - Two controllers on one chip. 3. Command Channel Secondary DMA Engine - Allows scatter gather list and SCB prefetch. - 4. 64 Byte SCB Support - Allows disconnected, unttagged request table + 4. 64 Byte SCB Support - Allows disconnected, untagged request table for all possible target/lun combinations. 5. Block Move Instruction Support - Doubles the speed of certain sequencer operations. @@ -159,8 +159,8 @@ The following information is available in this file: - Add support for 2.5.X's scsi_report_device_reset(). 6.2.34 (May 5th, 2003) - - Fix locking regression instroduced in 6.2.29 that - could cuase a lock order reversal between the io_request_lock + - Fix locking regression introduced in 6.2.29 that + could cause a lock order reversal between the io_request_lock and our per-softc lock. This was only possible on RH9, SuSE, and kernel.org 2.4.X kernels. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: INCORRECTLY CAN RENDER YOUR SYSTEM INOPERABLE. USE THEM WITH CAUTION. - Edit the file "modprobe.conf" in the directory /etc and add/edit a + Put a .conf file in the /etc/modprobe.d directory and add/edit a line containing 'options aic7xxx aic7xxx=[command[,command...]]' where 'command' is one or more of the following: ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: Option: tag_info:{{value[,value...]}[,{value[,value...]}...]} Definition: Set the per-target tagged queue depth on a per controller basis. Both controllers and targets - may be ommitted indicating that they should retain + may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default tag depth. Examples: tag_info:{{16,32,32,64,8,8,,32,32,32,32,32,32,32,32,32} On Controller 0 @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: ----------------------------------------------------------------- Option: dv: {value[,value...]} Definition: Set Domain Validation Policy on a per-controller basis. - Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default read streaming setting. Example: dv:{-1,0,,1,1,0} On Controller 0 leave DV at its default setting. @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: http://www.adaptec.com/buy-cables/. Europe - - Visit our Web site at http://www.adaptec-europe.com/. + - Visit our Web site at http://www.adaptec.com/en-US/_common/world_index. - To speak with a Technical Support Specialist, call, or email, * German: +49 89 4366 5522, Monday-Friday, 9:00-17:00 CET, http://ask-de.adaptec.com/. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 79e5ac6cb6f..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,511 +0,0 @@ - AIC7xxx Driver for Linux - -Introduction ----------------------------- -The AIC7xxx SCSI driver adds support for Adaptec (http://www.adaptec.com) -SCSI controllers and chipsets. Major portions of the driver and driver -development are shared between both Linux and FreeBSD. Support for the -AIC-7xxx chipsets have been in the default Linux kernel since approximately -linux-1.1.x and fairly stable since linux-1.2.x, and are also in FreeBSD -2.1.0 or later. - - Supported cards/chipsets - ---------------------------- - Adaptec Cards - ---------------------------- - AHA-274x - AHA-274xT - AHA-2842 - AHA-2910B - AHA-2920C - AHA-2930 - AHA-2930U - AHA-2930CU - AHA-2930U2 - AHA-2940 - AHA-2940W - AHA-2940U - AHA-2940UW - AHA-2940UW-PRO - AHA-2940AU - AHA-2940U2W - AHA-2940U2 - AHA-2940U2B - AHA-2940U2BOEM - AHA-2944D - AHA-2944WD - AHA-2944UD - AHA-2944UWD - AHA-2950U2 - AHA-2950U2W - AHA-2950U2B - AHA-29160M - AHA-3940 - AHA-3940U - AHA-3940W - AHA-3940UW - AHA-3940AUW - AHA-3940U2W - AHA-3950U2B - AHA-3950U2D - AHA-3960D - AHA-39160M - AHA-3985 - AHA-3985U - AHA-3985W - AHA-3985UW - - Motherboard Chipsets - ---------------------------- - AIC-777x - AIC-785x - AIC-786x - AIC-787x - AIC-788x - AIC-789x - AIC-3860 - - Bus Types - ---------------------------- - W - Wide SCSI, SCSI-3, 16bit bus, 68pin connector, will also support - SCSI-1/SCSI-2 50pin devices, transfer rates up to 20MB/s. - U - Ultra SCSI, transfer rates up to 40MB/s. - U2- Ultra 2 SCSI, transfer rates up to 80MB/s. - D - Differential SCSI. - T - Twin Channel SCSI. Up to 14 SCSI devices. - - AHA-274x - EISA SCSI controller - AHA-284x - VLB SCSI controller - AHA-29xx - PCI SCSI controller - AHA-394x - PCI controllers with two separate SCSI controllers on-board. - AHA-398x - PCI RAID controllers with three separate SCSI controllers - on-board. - - Not Supported Devices - ------------------------------ - Adaptec Cards - ---------------------------- - AHA-2920 (Only the cards that use the Future Domain chipset are not - supported, any 2920 cards based on Adaptec AIC chipsets, - such as the 2920C, are supported) - AAA-13x Raid Adapters - AAA-113x Raid Port Card - - Motherboard Chipsets - ---------------------------- - AIC-7810 - - Bus Types - ---------------------------- - R - Raid Port busses are not supported. - - The hardware RAID devices sold by Adaptec are *NOT* supported by this - driver (and will people please stop emailing me about them, they are - a totally separate beast from the bare SCSI controllers and this driver - can not be retrofitted in any sane manner to support the hardware RAID - features on those cards - Doug Ledford). - - - People - ------------------------------ - Justin T Gibbs gibbs@plutotech.com - (BSD Driver Author) - Dan Eischen deischen@iworks.InterWorks.org - (Original Linux Driver Co-maintainer) - Dean Gehnert deang@teleport.com - (Original Linux FTP/patch maintainer) - Jess Johnson jester@frenzy.com - (AIC7xxx FAQ author) - Doug Ledford dledford@redhat.com - (Current Linux aic7xxx-5.x.x Driver/Patch/FTP maintainer) - - Special thanks go to John Aycock (aycock@cpsc.ucalgary.ca), the original - author of the driver. John has since retired from the project. Thanks - again for all his work! - - Mailing list - ------------------------------ - There is a mailing list available for users who want to track development - and converse with other users and developers. This list is for both - FreeBSD and Linux support of the AIC7xxx chipsets. - - To subscribe to the AIC7xxx mailing list send mail to the list server, - with "subscribe AIC7xxx" in the body (no Subject: required): - To: majordomo@FreeBSD.ORG - --- - subscribe AIC7xxx - - To unsubscribe from the list, send mail to the list server with: - To: majordomo@FreeBSD.ORG - --- - unsubscribe AIC7xxx - - Send regular messages and replies to: AIC7xxx@FreeBSD.ORG - - Boot Command line options - ------------------------------ - "aic7xxx=no_reset" - Eliminate the SCSI bus reset during startup. - Some SCSI devices need the initial reset that this option disables - in order to work. If you have problems at bootup, please make sure - you aren't using this option. - - "aic7xxx=reverse_scan" - Certain PCI motherboards scan for devices at - bootup by scanning from the highest numbered PCI device to the - lowest numbered PCI device, others do just the opposite and scan - from lowest to highest numbered PCI device. There is no reliable - way to autodetect this ordering. So, we default to the most common - order, which is lowest to highest. Then, in case your motherboard - scans from highest to lowest, we have this option. If your BIOS - finds the drives on controller A before controller B but the linux - kernel finds your drives on controller B before A, then you should - use this option. - - "aic7xxx=extended" - Force the driver to detect extended drive translation - on your controller. This helps those people who have cards without - a SEEPROM make sure that linux and all other operating systems think - the same way about your hard drives. - - "aic7xxx=scbram" - Some cards have external SCB RAM that can be used to - give the card more hardware SCB slots. This allows the driver to use - that SCB RAM. Without this option, the driver won't touch the SCB - RAM because it is known to cause problems on a few cards out there - (such as 3985 class cards). - - "aic7xxx=irq_trigger:x" - Replace x with either 0 or 1 to force the kernel - to use the correct IRQ type for your card. This only applies to EISA - based controllers. On these controllers, 0 is for Edge triggered - interrupts, and 1 is for Level triggered interrupts. If you aren't - sure or don't know which IRQ trigger type your EISA card uses, then - let the kernel autodetect the trigger type. - - "aic7xxx=verbose" - This option can be used in one of two ways. If you - simply specify aic7xxx=verbose, then the kernel will automatically - pick the default set of verbose messages for you to see. - Alternatively, you can specify the command as - "aic7xxx=verbose:0xXXXX" where the X entries are replaced with - hexadecimal digits. This option is a bit field type option. For - a full listing of the available options, search for the - #define VERBOSE_xxxxxx lines in the aic7xxx.c file. If you want - verbose messages, then it is recommended that you simply use the - aic7xxx=verbose variant of this command. - - "aic7xxx=pci_parity:x" - This option controls whether or not the driver - enables PCI parity error checking on the PCI bus. By default, this - checking is disabled. To enable the checks, simply specify pci_parity - with no value afterwords. To reverse the parity from even to odd, - supply any number other than 0 or 255. In short: - pci_parity - Even parity checking (even is the normal PCI parity) - pci_parity:x - Where x > 0, Odd parity checking - pci_parity:0 - No check (default) - NOTE: In order to get Even PCI parity checking, you must use the - version of the option that does not include the : and a number at - the end (unless you want to enter exactly 2^32 - 1 as the number). - - "aic7xxx=no_probe" - This option will disable the probing for any VLB - based 2842 controllers and any EISA based controllers. This is - needed on certain newer motherboards where the normal EISA I/O ranges - have been claimed by other PCI devices. Probing on those machines - will often result in the machine crashing or spontaneously rebooting - during startup. Examples of machines that need this are the - Dell PowerEdge 6300 machines. - - "aic7xxx=seltime:2" - This option controls how long the card waits - during a device selection sequence for the device to respond. - The original SCSI spec says that this "should be" 256ms. This - is generally not required with modern devices. However, some - very old SCSI I devices need the full 256ms. Most modern devices - can run fine with only 64ms. The default for this option is - 64ms. If you need to change this option, then use the following - table to set the proper value in the example above: - 0 - 256ms - 1 - 128ms - 2 - 64ms - 3 - 32ms - - "aic7xxx=panic_on_abort" - This option is for debugging and will cause - the driver to panic the linux kernel and freeze the system the first - time the drivers abort or reset routines are called. This is most - helpful when some problem causes infinite reset loops that scroll too - fast to see. By using this option, you can write down what the errors - actually are and send that information to me so it can be fixed. - - "aic7xxx=dump_card" - This option will print out the *entire* set of - configuration registers on the card during the init sequence. This - is a debugging aid used to see exactly what state the card is in - when we finally finish our initialization routines. If you don't - have documentation on the chipsets, this will do you absolutely - no good unless you are simply trying to write all the information - down in order to send it to me. - - "aic7xxx=dump_sequencer" - This is the same as the above options except - that instead of dumping the register contents on the card, this - option dumps the contents of the sequencer program RAM. This gives - the ability to verify that the instructions downloaded to the - card's sequencer are indeed what they are suppossed to be. Again, - unless you have documentation to tell you how to interpret these - numbers, then it is totally useless. - - "aic7xxx=override_term:0xffffffff" - This option is used to force the - termination on your SCSI controllers to a particular setting. This - is a bit mask variable that applies for up to 8 aic7xxx SCSI channels. - Each channel gets 4 bits, divided as follows: - bit 3 2 1 0 - | | | Enable/Disable Single Ended Low Byte Termination - | | En/Disable Single Ended High Byte Termination - | En/Disable Low Byte LVD Termination - En/Disable High Byte LVD Termination - - The upper 2 bits that deal with LVD termination only apply to Ultra2 - controllers. Futhermore, due to the current Ultra2 controller - designs, these bits are tied together such that setting either bit - enables both low and high byte LVD termination. It is not possible - to only set high or low byte LVD termination in this manner. This is - an artifact of the BIOS definition on Ultra2 controllers. For other - controllers, the only important bits are the two lowest bits. Setting - the higher bits on non-Ultra2 controllers has no effect. A few - examples of how to use this option: - - Enable low and high byte termination on a non-ultra2 controller that - is the first aic7xxx controller (the correct bits are 0011), - aic7xxx=override_term:0x3 - - Enable all termination on the third aic7xxx controller, high byte - termination on the second aic7xxx controller, and low and high byte - SE termination on the first aic7xxx controller - (bits are 1111 0010 0011), - aic7xxx=override_term:0xf23 - - No attempt has been made to make this option non-cryptic. It really - shouldn't be used except in dire circumstances, and if that happens, - I'm probably going to be telling you what to set this to anyway :) - - "aic7xxx=stpwlev:0xffffffff" - This option is used to control the STPWLEV - bit in the DEVCONFIG PCI register. Currently, this is one of the - very few registers that we have absolutely *no* way of detecting - what the variable should be. It depends entirely on how the chipset - and external terminators were coupled by the card/motherboard maker. - Further, a chip reset (at power up) always sets this bit to 0. If - there is no BIOS to run on the chipset/card (such as with a 2910C - or a motherboard controller with the BIOS totally disabled) then - the variable may not get set properly. Of course, if the proper - setting was 0, then that's what it would be after the reset, but if - the proper setting is actually 1.....you get the picture. Now, since - we can't detect this at all, I've added this option to force the - setting. If you have a BIOS on your controller then you should never - need to use this option. However, if you are having lots of SCSI - reset problems and can't seem to get them knocked out, this may help. - - Here's a test to know for certain if you need this option. Make - a boot floppy that you can use to boot your computer up and that - will detect the aic7xxx controller. Next, power down your computer. - While it's down, unplug all SCSI cables from your Adaptec SCSI - controller. Boot the system back up to the Adaptec EZ-SCSI BIOS - and then make sure that termination is enabled on your adapter (if - you have an Adaptec BIOS of course). Next, boot up the floppy you - made and wait for it to detect the aic7xxx controller. If the kernel - finds the controller fine, says scsi : x hosts and then tries to - detect your devices like normal, up to the point where it fails to - mount your root file system and panics, then you're fine. If, on - the other hand, the system goes into an infinite reset loop, then - you need to use this option and/or the previous option to force the - proper termination settings on your controller. If this happens, - then you next need to figure out what your settings should be. - - To find the correct settings, power your machine back down, connect - back up the SCSI cables, and boot back into your machine like normal. - However, boot with the aic7xxx=verbose:0x39 option. Record the - initial DEVCONFIG values for each of your aic7xxx controllers as - they are listed, and also record what the machine is detecting as - the proper termination on your controllers. NOTE: the order in - which the initial DEVCONFIG values are printed out is not gauranteed - to be the same order as the SCSI controllers are registered. The - above option and this option both work on the order of the SCSI - controllers as they are registered, so make sure you match the right - DEVCONFIG values with the right controllers if you have more than - one aic7xxx controller. - - Once you have the detected termination settings and the initial - DEVCONFIG values for each controller, then figure out what the - termination on each of the controllers *should* be. Hopefully, that - part is correct, but it could possibly be wrong if there is - bogus cable detection logic on your controller or something similar. - If all the controllers have the correct termination settings, then - don't set the aic7xxx=override_term variable at all, leave it alone. - Next, on any controllers that go into an infinite reset loop when - you unplug all the SCSI cables, get the starting DEVCONFIG value. - If the initial DEVCONFIG value is divisible by 2, then the correct - setting for that controller is 0. If it's an odd number, then - the correct setting for that controller is 1. For any other - controllers that didn't have an infinite reset problem, then reverse - the above options. If DEVCONFIG was even, then the correct setting - is 1, if not then the correct setting is 0. - - Now that you know what the correct setting was for each controller, - we need to encode that into the aic7xxx=stpwlev:0x... variable. - This variable is a bit field encoded variable. Bit 0 is for the first - aic7xxx controller, bit 1 for the next, etc. Put all these bits - together and you get a number. For example, if the third aic7xxx - needed a 1, but the second and first both needed a 0, then the bits - would be 100 in binary. This then translates to 0x04. You would - therefore set aic7xxx=stpwlev:0x04. This is fairly standard binary - to hexadecimal conversions here. If you aren't up to speed on the - binary->hex conversion then send an email to the aic7xxx mailing - list and someone can help you out. - - "aic7xxx=tag_info:{{8,8..},{8,8..},..}" - This option is used to disable - or enable Tagged Command Queueing (TCQ) on specific devices. As of - driver version 5.1.11, TCQ is now either on or off by default - according to the setting you choose during the make config process. - In order to en/disable TCQ for certian devices at boot time, a user - may use this boot param. The driver will then parse this message out - and en/disable the specific device entries that are present based upon - the value given. The param line is parsed in the following manner: - - { - first instance indicates the start of this parameter values - second instance is the start of entries for a particular - device entry - } - end the entries for a particular host adapter, or end the entire - set of parameter entries - , - move to next entry. Inside of a set of device entries, this - moves us to the next device on the list. Outside of device - entries, this moves us to the next host adapter - . - Same effect as , but is safe to use with insmod. - x - the number to enter into the array at this position. - 0 = Enable tagged queueing on this device and use the default - queue depth - 1-254 = Enable tagged queueing on this device and use this - number as the queue depth - 255 = Disable tagged queueing on this device. - Note: anything above 32 for an actual queue depth is wasteful - and not recommended. - - A few examples of how this can be used: - - tag_info:{{8,12,,0,,255,4}} - This line will only effect the first aic7xxx card registered. It - will set scsi id 0 to a queue depth of 8, id 1 to 12, leave id 2 - at the default, set id 3 to tagged queueing enabled and use the - default queue depth, id 4 default, id 5 disabled, and id 6 to 4. - Any not specified entries stay at the default value, repeated - commas with no value specified will simply increment to the next id - without changing anything for the missing values. - - tag_info:{,,,{,,,255}} - First, second, and third adapters at default values. Fourth - adapter, id 3 is disabled. Notice that leading commas simply - increment what the first number effects, and there are no need - for trailing commas. When you close out an adapter, or the - entire entry, anything not explicitly set stays at the default - value. - - A final note on this option. The scanner I used for this isn't - perfect or highly robust. If you mess the line up, the worst that - should happen is that the line will get ignored. If you don't - close out the entire entry with the final bracket, then any other - aic7xxx options after this will get ignored. So, in general, be - sure of what you are entering, and after you have it right, just - add it to the lilo.conf file so there won't be any mistakes. As - a means of checking this parser, the entire tag_info array for - each card is now printed out in the /proc/scsi/aic7xxx/x file. You - can use that to verify that your options were parsed correctly. - - Boot command line options may be combined to form the proper set of options - a user might need. For example, the following is valid: - - aic7xxx=verbose,extended,irq_trigger:1 - - The only requirement is that individual options be separated by a comma or - a period on the command line. - - Module Loading command options - ------------------------------ - When loading the aic7xxx driver as a module, the exact same options are - available to the user. However, the syntax to specify the options changes - slightly. For insmod, you need to wrap the aic7xxx= argument in quotes - and replace all ',' with '.'. So, for example, a valid insmod line - would be: - - insmod aic7xxx aic7xxx='verbose.irq_trigger:1.extended' - - This line should result in the *exact* same behaviour as if you typed - it in at the lilo prompt and the driver was compiled into the kernel - instead of being a module. The reason for the single quote is so that - the shell won't try to interpret anything in the line, such as {. - Insmod assumes any options starting with a letter instead of a number - is a character string (which is what we want) and by switching all of - the commas to periods, insmod won't interpret this as more than one - string and write junk into our binary image. I consider it a bug in - the insmod program that even if you wrap your string in quotes (quotes - that pass the shell mind you and that insmod sees) it still treates - a comma inside of those quotes as starting a new variable, resulting - in memory scribbles if you don't switch the commas to periods. - - - Kernel Compile options - ------------------------------ - The various kernel compile time options for this driver are now fairly - well documented in the file Documentation/Configure.help. In order to - see this documentation, you need to use one of the advanced configuration - programs (menuconfig and xconfig). If you are using the "make menuconfig" - method of configuring your kernel, then you would simply highlight the - option in question and hit the ? key. If you are using the "make xconfig" - method of configuring your kernel, then simply click on the help button - next to the option you have questions about. The help information from - the Configure.help file will then get automatically displayed. - - /proc support - ------------------------------ - The /proc support for the AIC7xxx can be found in the /proc/scsi/aic7xxx/ - directory. That directory contains a file for each SCSI controller in - the system. Each file presents the current configuration and transfer - statistics (enabled with #define in aic7xxx.c) for each controller. - - Thanks to Michael Neuffer for his upper-level SCSI help, and - Matthew Jacob for statistics support. - - Debugging the driver - ------------------------------ - Should you have problems with this driver, and would like some help in - getting them solved, there are a couple debugging items built into - the driver to facilitate getting the needed information from the system. - In general, I need a complete description of the problem, with as many - logs as possible concerning what happens. To help with this, there is - a command option aic7xxx=panic_on_abort. This option, when set, forces - the driver to panic the kernel on the first SCSI abort issued by the - mid level SCSI code. If your system is going to reset loops and you - can't read the screen, then this is what you need. Not only will it - stop the system, but it also prints out a large amount of state - information in the process. Second, if you specify the option - "aic7xxx=verbose:0x1ffff", the system will print out *SOOOO* much - information as it runs that you won't be able to see anything. - However, this can actually be very useful if your machine simply - locks up when trying to boot, since it will pin-point what was last - happening (in regards to the aic7xxx driver) immediately prior to - the lockup. This is really only useful if your machine simply can - not boot up successfully. If you can get your machine to run, then - this will produce far too much information. - - FTP sites - ------------------------------ - ftp://ftp.redhat.com/pub/aic/ - - Out of date. I used to keep stuff here, but too many people - complained about having a hard time getting into Red Hat's ftp - server. So use the web site below instead. - ftp://ftp.pcnet.com/users/eischen/Linux/ - - Dan Eischen's driver distribution area - ftp://ekf2.vsb.cz/pub/linux/kernel/aic7xxx/ftp.teleport.com/ - - European Linux mirror of Teleport site - - Web sites - ------------------------------ - http://people.redhat.com/dledford/ - - My web site, also the primary aic7xxx site with several related - pages. - -Dean W. Gehnert -deang@teleport.com - -$Revision: 3.0 $ - -Modified by Doug Ledford 1998-2000 - diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/arcmsr_spec.txt b/Documentation/scsi/arcmsr_spec.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..45d9482c151 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/arcmsr_spec.txt @@ -0,0 +1,574 @@ +******************************************************************************* +** ARECA FIRMWARE SPEC +******************************************************************************* +** Usage of IOP331 adapter +** (All In/Out is in IOP331's view) +** 1. Message 0 --> InitThread message and return code +** 2. Doorbell is used for RS-232 emulation +** inDoorBell : bit0 -- data in ready +** (DRIVER DATA WRITE OK) +** bit1 -- data out has been read +** (DRIVER DATA READ OK) +** outDooeBell: bit0 -- data out ready +** (IOP331 DATA WRITE OK) +** bit1 -- data in has been read +** (IOP331 DATA READ OK) +** 3. Index Memory Usage +** offset 0xf00 : for RS232 out (request buffer) +** offset 0xe00 : for RS232 in (scratch buffer) +** offset 0xa00 : for inbound message code message_rwbuffer +** (driver send to IOP331) +** offset 0xa00 : for outbound message code message_rwbuffer +** (IOP331 send to driver) +** 4. RS-232 emulation +** Currently 128 byte buffer is used +** 1st uint32_t : Data length (1--124) +** Byte 4--127 : Max 124 bytes of data +** 5. PostQ +** All SCSI Command must be sent through postQ: +** (inbound queue port) Request frame must be 32 bytes aligned +** #bit27--bit31 => flag for post ccb +** #bit0--bit26 => real address (bit27--bit31) of post arcmsr_cdb +** bit31 : +** 0 : 256 bytes frame +** 1 : 512 bytes frame +** bit30 : +** 0 : normal request +** 1 : BIOS request +** bit29 : reserved +** bit28 : reserved +** bit27 : reserved +** --------------------------------------------------------------------------- +** (outbount queue port) Request reply +** #bit27--bit31 +** => flag for reply +** #bit0--bit26 +** => real address (bit27--bit31) of reply arcmsr_cdb +** bit31 : must be 0 (for this type of reply) +** bit30 : reserved for BIOS handshake +** bit29 : reserved +** bit28 : +** 0 : no error, ignore AdapStatus/DevStatus/SenseData +** 1 : Error, error code in AdapStatus/DevStatus/SenseData +** bit27 : reserved +** 6. BIOS request +** All BIOS request is the same with request from PostQ +** Except : +** Request frame is sent from configuration space +** offset: 0x78 : Request Frame (bit30 == 1) +** offset: 0x18 : writeonly to generate +** IRQ to IOP331 +** Completion of request: +** (bit30 == 0, bit28==err flag) +** 7. Definition of SGL entry (structure) +** 8. Message1 Out - Diag Status Code (????) +** 9. Message0 message code : +** 0x00 : NOP +** 0x01 : Get Config +** ->offset 0xa00 :for outbound message code message_rwbuffer +** (IOP331 send to driver) +** Signature 0x87974060(4) +** Request len 0x00000200(4) +** numbers of queue 0x00000100(4) +** SDRAM Size 0x00000100(4)-->256 MB +** IDE Channels 0x00000008(4) +** vendor 40 bytes char +** model 8 bytes char +** FirmVer 16 bytes char +** Device Map 16 bytes char +** FirmwareVersion DWORD <== Added for checking of +** new firmware capability +** 0x02 : Set Config +** ->offset 0xa00 :for inbound message code message_rwbuffer +** (driver send to IOP331) +** Signature 0x87974063(4) +** UPPER32 of Request Frame (4)-->Driver Only +** 0x03 : Reset (Abort all queued Command) +** 0x04 : Stop Background Activity +** 0x05 : Flush Cache +** 0x06 : Start Background Activity +** (re-start if background is halted) +** 0x07 : Check If Host Command Pending +** (Novell May Need This Function) +** 0x08 : Set controller time +** ->offset 0xa00 : for inbound message code message_rwbuffer +** (driver to IOP331) +** byte 0 : 0xaa <-- signature +** byte 1 : 0x55 <-- signature +** byte 2 : year (04) +** byte 3 : month (1..12) +** byte 4 : date (1..31) +** byte 5 : hour (0..23) +** byte 6 : minute (0..59) +** byte 7 : second (0..59) +******************************************************************************* +******************************************************************************* +** RS-232 Interface for Areca Raid Controller +** The low level command interface is exclusive with VT100 terminal +** -------------------------------------------------------------------- +** 1. Sequence of command execution +** -------------------------------------------------------------------- +** (A) Header : 3 bytes sequence (0x5E, 0x01, 0x61) +** (B) Command block : variable length of data including length, +** command code, data and checksum byte +** (C) Return data : variable length of data +** -------------------------------------------------------------------- +** 2. Command block +** -------------------------------------------------------------------- +** (A) 1st byte : command block length (low byte) +** (B) 2nd byte : command block length (high byte) +** note ..command block length shouldn't > 2040 bytes, +** length excludes these two bytes +** (C) 3rd byte : command code +** (D) 4th and following bytes : variable length data bytes +** depends on command code +** (E) last byte : checksum byte (sum of 1st byte until last data byte) +** -------------------------------------------------------------------- +** 3. Command code and associated data +** -------------------------------------------------------------------- +** The following are command code defined in raid controller Command +** code 0x10--0x1? are used for system level management, +** no password checking is needed and should be implemented in separate +** well controlled utility and not for end user access. +** Command code 0x20--0x?? always check the password, +** password must be entered to enable these command. +** enum +** { +** GUI_SET_SERIAL=0x10, +** GUI_SET_VENDOR, +** GUI_SET_MODEL, +** GUI_IDENTIFY, +** GUI_CHECK_PASSWORD, +** GUI_LOGOUT, +** GUI_HTTP, +** GUI_SET_ETHERNET_ADDR, +** GUI_SET_LOGO, +** GUI_POLL_EVENT, +** GUI_GET_EVENT, +** GUI_GET_HW_MONITOR, +** // GUI_QUICK_CREATE=0x20, (function removed) +** GUI_GET_INFO_R=0x20, +** GUI_GET_INFO_V, +** GUI_GET_INFO_P, +** GUI_GET_INFO_S, +** GUI_CLEAR_EVENT, +** GUI_MUTE_BEEPER=0x30, +** GUI_BEEPER_SETTING, +** GUI_SET_PASSWORD, +** GUI_HOST_INTERFACE_MODE, +** GUI_REBUILD_PRIORITY, +** GUI_MAX_ATA_MODE, +** GUI_RESET_CONTROLLER, +** GUI_COM_PORT_SETTING, +** GUI_NO_OPERATION, +** GUI_DHCP_IP, +** GUI_CREATE_PASS_THROUGH=0x40, +** GUI_MODIFY_PASS_THROUGH, +** GUI_DELETE_PASS_THROUGH, +** GUI_IDENTIFY_DEVICE, +** GUI_CREATE_RAIDSET=0x50, +** GUI_DELETE_RAIDSET, +** GUI_EXPAND_RAIDSET, +** GUI_ACTIVATE_RAIDSET, +** GUI_CREATE_HOT_SPARE, +** GUI_DELETE_HOT_SPARE, +** GUI_CREATE_VOLUME=0x60, +** GUI_MODIFY_VOLUME, +** GUI_DELETE_VOLUME, +** GUI_START_CHECK_VOLUME, +** GUI_STOP_CHECK_VOLUME +** }; +** Command description : +** GUI_SET_SERIAL : Set the controller serial# +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x10 +** byte 3 : password length (should be 0x0f) +** byte 4-0x13 : should be "ArEcATecHnoLogY" +** byte 0x14--0x23 : Serial number string (must be 16 bytes) +** GUI_SET_VENDOR : Set vendor string for the controller +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x11 +** byte 3 : password length (should be 0x08) +** byte 4-0x13 : should be "ArEcAvAr" +** byte 0x14--0x3B : vendor string (must be 40 bytes) +** GUI_SET_MODEL : Set the model name of the controller +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x12 +** byte 3 : password length (should be 0x08) +** byte 4-0x13 : should be "ArEcAvAr" +** byte 0x14--0x1B : model string (must be 8 bytes) +** GUI_IDENTIFY : Identify device +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x13 +** return "Areca RAID Subsystem " +** GUI_CHECK_PASSWORD : Verify password +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x14 +** byte 3 : password length +** byte 4-0x?? : user password to be checked +** GUI_LOGOUT : Logout GUI (force password checking on next command) +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x15 +** GUI_HTTP : HTTP interface (reserved for Http proxy service)(0x16) +** +** GUI_SET_ETHERNET_ADDR : Set the ethernet MAC address +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x17 +** byte 3 : password length (should be 0x08) +** byte 4-0x13 : should be "ArEcAvAr" +** byte 0x14--0x19 : Ethernet MAC address (must be 6 bytes) +** GUI_SET_LOGO : Set logo in HTTP +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x18 +** byte 3 : Page# (0/1/2/3) (0xff --> clear OEM logo) +** byte 4/5/6/7 : 0x55/0xaa/0xa5/0x5a +** byte 8 : TITLE.JPG data (each page must be 2000 bytes) +** note page0 1st 2 byte must be +** actual length of the JPG file +** GUI_POLL_EVENT : Poll If Event Log Changed +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x19 +** GUI_GET_EVENT : Read Event +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x1a +** byte 3 : Event Page (0:1st page/1/2/3:last page) +** GUI_GET_HW_MONITOR : Get HW monitor data +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x1b +** byte 3 : # of FANs(example 2) +** byte 4 : # of Voltage sensor(example 3) +** byte 5 : # of temperature sensor(example 2) +** byte 6 : # of power +** byte 7/8 : Fan#0 (RPM) +** byte 9/10 : Fan#1 +** byte 11/12 : Voltage#0 original value in *1000 +** byte 13/14 : Voltage#0 value +** byte 15/16 : Voltage#1 org +** byte 17/18 : Voltage#1 +** byte 19/20 : Voltage#2 org +** byte 21/22 : Voltage#2 +** byte 23 : Temp#0 +** byte 24 : Temp#1 +** byte 25 : Power indicator (bit0 : power#0, +** bit1 : power#1) +** byte 26 : UPS indicator +** GUI_QUICK_CREATE : Quick create raid/volume set +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x20 +** byte 3/4/5/6 : raw capacity +** byte 7 : raid level +** byte 8 : stripe size +** byte 9 : spare +** byte 10/11/12/13: device mask (the devices to create raid/volume) +** This function is removed, application like +** to implement quick create function +** need to use GUI_CREATE_RAIDSET and GUI_CREATE_VOLUMESET function. +** GUI_GET_INFO_R : Get Raid Set Information +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x20 +** byte 3 : raidset# +** typedef struct sGUI_RAIDSET +** { +** BYTE grsRaidSetName[16]; +** DWORD grsCapacity; +** DWORD grsCapacityX; +** DWORD grsFailMask; +** BYTE grsDevArray[32]; +** BYTE grsMemberDevices; +** BYTE grsNewMemberDevices; +** BYTE grsRaidState; +** BYTE grsVolumes; +** BYTE grsVolumeList[16]; +** BYTE grsRes1; +** BYTE grsRes2; +** BYTE grsRes3; +** BYTE grsFreeSegments; +** DWORD grsRawStripes[8]; +** DWORD grsRes4; +** DWORD grsRes5; // Total to 128 bytes +** DWORD grsRes6; // Total to 128 bytes +** } sGUI_RAIDSET, *pGUI_RAIDSET; +** GUI_GET_INFO_V : Get Volume Set Information +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x21 +** byte 3 : volumeset# +** typedef struct sGUI_VOLUMESET +** { +** BYTE gvsVolumeName[16]; // 16 +** DWORD gvsCapacity; +** DWORD gvsCapacityX; +** DWORD gvsFailMask; +** DWORD gvsStripeSize; +** DWORD gvsNewFailMask; +** DWORD gvsNewStripeSize; +** DWORD gvsVolumeStatus; +** DWORD gvsProgress; // 32 +** sSCSI_ATTR gvsScsi; +** BYTE gvsMemberDisks; +** BYTE gvsRaidLevel; // 8 +** BYTE gvsNewMemberDisks; +** BYTE gvsNewRaidLevel; +** BYTE gvsRaidSetNumber; +** BYTE gvsRes0; // 4 +** BYTE gvsRes1[4]; // 64 bytes +** } sGUI_VOLUMESET, *pGUI_VOLUMESET; +** GUI_GET_INFO_P : Get Physical Drive Information +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x22 +** byte 3 : drive # (from 0 to max-channels - 1) +** typedef struct sGUI_PHY_DRV +** { +** BYTE gpdModelName[40]; +** BYTE gpdSerialNumber[20]; +** BYTE gpdFirmRev[8]; +** DWORD gpdCapacity; +** DWORD gpdCapacityX; // Reserved for expansion +** BYTE gpdDeviceState; +** BYTE gpdPioMode; +** BYTE gpdCurrentUdmaMode; +** BYTE gpdUdmaMode; +** BYTE gpdDriveSelect; +** BYTE gpdRaidNumber; // 0xff if not belongs to a raid set +** sSCSI_ATTR gpdScsi; +** BYTE gpdReserved[40]; // Total to 128 bytes +** } sGUI_PHY_DRV, *pGUI_PHY_DRV; +** GUI_GET_INFO_S : Get System Information +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x23 +** typedef struct sCOM_ATTR +** { +** BYTE comBaudRate; +** BYTE comDataBits; +** BYTE comStopBits; +** BYTE comParity; +** BYTE comFlowControl; +** } sCOM_ATTR, *pCOM_ATTR; +** typedef struct sSYSTEM_INFO +** { +** BYTE gsiVendorName[40]; +** BYTE gsiSerialNumber[16]; +** BYTE gsiFirmVersion[16]; +** BYTE gsiBootVersion[16]; +** BYTE gsiMbVersion[16]; +** BYTE gsiModelName[8]; +** BYTE gsiLocalIp[4]; +** BYTE gsiCurrentIp[4]; +** DWORD gsiTimeTick; +** DWORD gsiCpuSpeed; +** DWORD gsiICache; +** DWORD gsiDCache; +** DWORD gsiScache; +** DWORD gsiMemorySize; +** DWORD gsiMemorySpeed; +** DWORD gsiEvents; +** BYTE gsiMacAddress[6]; +** BYTE gsiDhcp; +** BYTE gsiBeeper; +** BYTE gsiChannelUsage; +** BYTE gsiMaxAtaMode; +** BYTE gsiSdramEcc; // 1:if ECC enabled +** BYTE gsiRebuildPriority; +** sCOM_ATTR gsiComA; // 5 bytes +** sCOM_ATTR gsiComB; // 5 bytes +** BYTE gsiIdeChannels; +** BYTE gsiScsiHostChannels; +** BYTE gsiIdeHostChannels; +** BYTE gsiMaxVolumeSet; +** BYTE gsiMaxRaidSet; +** BYTE gsiEtherPort; // 1:if ether net port supported +** BYTE gsiRaid6Engine; // 1:Raid6 engine supported +** BYTE gsiRes[75]; +** } sSYSTEM_INFO, *pSYSTEM_INFO; +** GUI_CLEAR_EVENT : Clear System Event +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x24 +** GUI_MUTE_BEEPER : Mute current beeper +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x30 +** GUI_BEEPER_SETTING : Disable beeper +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x31 +** byte 3 : 0->disable, 1->enable +** GUI_SET_PASSWORD : Change password +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x32 +** byte 3 : pass word length ( must <= 15 ) +** byte 4 : password (must be alpha-numerical) +** GUI_HOST_INTERFACE_MODE : Set host interface mode +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x33 +** byte 3 : 0->Independent, 1->cluster +** GUI_REBUILD_PRIORITY : Set rebuild priority +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x34 +** byte 3 : 0/1/2/3 (low->high) +** GUI_MAX_ATA_MODE : Set maximum ATA mode to be used +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x35 +** byte 3 : 0/1/2/3 (133/100/66/33) +** GUI_RESET_CONTROLLER : Reset Controller +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x36 +** *Response with VT100 screen (discard it) +** GUI_COM_PORT_SETTING : COM port setting +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x37 +** byte 3 : 0->COMA (term port), +** 1->COMB (debug port) +** byte 4 : 0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7 +** (1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200) +** byte 5 : data bit +** (0:7 bit, 1:8 bit : must be 8 bit) +** byte 6 : stop bit (0:1, 1:2 stop bits) +** byte 7 : parity (0:none, 1:off, 2:even) +** byte 8 : flow control +** (0:none, 1:xon/xoff, 2:hardware => must use none) +** GUI_NO_OPERATION : No operation +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x38 +** GUI_DHCP_IP : Set DHCP option and local IP address +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x39 +** byte 3 : 0:dhcp disabled, 1:dhcp enabled +** byte 4/5/6/7 : IP address +** GUI_CREATE_PASS_THROUGH : Create pass through disk +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x40 +** byte 3 : device # +** byte 4 : scsi channel (0/1) +** byte 5 : scsi id (0-->15) +** byte 6 : scsi lun (0-->7) +** byte 7 : tagged queue (1 : enabled) +** byte 8 : cache mode (1 : enabled) +** byte 9 : max speed (0/1/2/3/4, +** async/20/40/80/160 for scsi) +** (0/1/2/3/4, 33/66/100/133/150 for ide ) +** GUI_MODIFY_PASS_THROUGH : Modify pass through disk +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x41 +** byte 3 : device # +** byte 4 : scsi channel (0/1) +** byte 5 : scsi id (0-->15) +** byte 6 : scsi lun (0-->7) +** byte 7 : tagged queue (1 : enabled) +** byte 8 : cache mode (1 : enabled) +** byte 9 : max speed (0/1/2/3/4, +** async/20/40/80/160 for scsi) +** (0/1/2/3/4, 33/66/100/133/150 for ide ) +** GUI_DELETE_PASS_THROUGH : Delete pass through disk +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x42 +** byte 3 : device# to be deleted +** GUI_IDENTIFY_DEVICE : Identify Device +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x43 +** byte 3 : Flash Method +** (0:flash selected, 1:flash not selected) +** byte 4/5/6/7 : IDE device mask to be flashed +** note .... no response data available +** GUI_CREATE_RAIDSET : Create Raid Set +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x50 +** byte 3/4/5/6 : device mask +** byte 7-22 : raidset name (if byte 7 == 0:use default) +** GUI_DELETE_RAIDSET : Delete Raid Set +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x51 +** byte 3 : raidset# +** GUI_EXPAND_RAIDSET : Expand Raid Set +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x52 +** byte 3 : raidset# +** byte 4/5/6/7 : device mask for expansion +** byte 8/9/10 : (8:0 no change, 1 change, 0xff:terminate, +** 9:new raid level, +** 10:new stripe size +** 0/1/2/3/4/5->4/8/16/32/64/128K ) +** byte 11/12/13 : repeat for each volume in the raidset +** GUI_ACTIVATE_RAIDSET : Activate incomplete raid set +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x53 +** byte 3 : raidset# +** GUI_CREATE_HOT_SPARE : Create hot spare disk +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x54 +** byte 3/4/5/6 : device mask for hot spare creation +** GUI_DELETE_HOT_SPARE : Delete hot spare disk +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x55 +** byte 3/4/5/6 : device mask for hot spare deletion +** GUI_CREATE_VOLUME : Create volume set +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x60 +** byte 3 : raidset# +** byte 4-19 : volume set name +** (if byte4 == 0, use default) +** byte 20-27 : volume capacity (blocks) +** byte 28 : raid level +** byte 29 : stripe size +** (0/1/2/3/4/5->4/8/16/32/64/128K) +** byte 30 : channel +** byte 31 : ID +** byte 32 : LUN +** byte 33 : 1 enable tag +** byte 34 : 1 enable cache +** byte 35 : speed +** (0/1/2/3/4->async/20/40/80/160 for scsi) +** (0/1/2/3/4->33/66/100/133/150 for IDE ) +** byte 36 : 1 to select quick init +** +** GUI_MODIFY_VOLUME : Modify volume Set +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x61 +** byte 3 : volumeset# +** byte 4-19 : new volume set name +** (if byte4 == 0, not change) +** byte 20-27 : new volume capacity (reserved) +** byte 28 : new raid level +** byte 29 : new stripe size +** (0/1/2/3/4/5->4/8/16/32/64/128K) +** byte 30 : new channel +** byte 31 : new ID +** byte 32 : new LUN +** byte 33 : 1 enable tag +** byte 34 : 1 enable cache +** byte 35 : speed +** (0/1/2/3/4->async/20/40/80/160 for scsi) +** (0/1/2/3/4->33/66/100/133/150 for IDE ) +** GUI_DELETE_VOLUME : Delete volume set +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x62 +** byte 3 : volumeset# +** GUI_START_CHECK_VOLUME : Start volume consistency check +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x63 +** byte 3 : volumeset# +** GUI_STOP_CHECK_VOLUME : Stop volume consistency check +** byte 0,1 : length +** byte 2 : command code 0x64 +** --------------------------------------------------------------------- +** 4. Returned data +** --------------------------------------------------------------------- +** (A) Header : 3 bytes sequence (0x5E, 0x01, 0x61) +** (B) Length : 2 bytes +** (low byte 1st, excludes length and checksum byte) +** (C) status or data : +** <1> If length == 1 ==> 1 byte status code +** #define GUI_OK 0x41 +** #define GUI_RAIDSET_NOT_NORMAL 0x42 +** #define GUI_VOLUMESET_NOT_NORMAL 0x43 +** #define GUI_NO_RAIDSET 0x44 +** #define GUI_NO_VOLUMESET 0x45 +** #define GUI_NO_PHYSICAL_DRIVE 0x46 +** #define GUI_PARAMETER_ERROR 0x47 +** #define GUI_UNSUPPORTED_COMMAND 0x48 +** #define GUI_DISK_CONFIG_CHANGED 0x49 +** #define GUI_INVALID_PASSWORD 0x4a +** #define GUI_NO_DISK_SPACE 0x4b +** #define GUI_CHECKSUM_ERROR 0x4c +** #define GUI_PASSWORD_REQUIRED 0x4d +** <2> If length > 1 ==> +** data block returned from controller +** and the contents depends on the command code +** (E) Checksum : checksum of length and status or data byte +************************************************************************** diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/bfa.txt b/Documentation/scsi/bfa.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f2d6e9d1791 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/bfa.txt @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +Linux driver for Brocade FC/FCOE adapters + + +Supported Hardware +------------------ + +bfa 3.0.2.2 driver supports all Brocade FC/FCOE adapters. Below is a list of +adapter models with corresponding PCIIDs. + + PCIID Model + + 1657:0013:1657:0014 425 4Gbps dual port FC HBA + 1657:0013:1657:0014 825 8Gbps PCIe dual port FC HBA + 1657:0013:103c:1742 HP 82B 8Gbps PCIedual port FC HBA + 1657:0013:103c:1744 HP 42B 4Gbps dual port FC HBA + 1657:0017:1657:0014 415 4Gbps single port FC HBA + 1657:0017:1657:0014 815 8Gbps single port FC HBA + 1657:0017:103c:1741 HP 41B 4Gbps single port FC HBA + 1657:0017:103c 1743 HP 81B 8Gbps single port FC HBA + 1657:0021:103c:1779 804 8Gbps FC HBA for HP Bladesystem c-class + + 1657:0014:1657:0014 1010 10Gbps single port CNA - FCOE + 1657:0014:1657:0014 1020 10Gbps dual port CNA - FCOE + 1657:0014:1657:0014 1007 10Gbps dual port CNA - FCOE + 1657:0014:1657:0014 1741 10Gbps dual port CNA - FCOE + + 1657:0022:1657:0024 1860 16Gbps FC HBA + 1657:0022:1657:0022 1860 10Gbps CNA - FCOE + + +Firmware download +----------------- + +The latest Firmware package for 3.0.2.2 bfa driver can be found at: + +http://www.brocade.com/services-support/drivers-downloads/adapters/Linux.page + +and then click following respective util package link: + + Version Link + + v3.0.0.0 Linux Adapter Firmware package for RHEL 6.2, SLES 11SP2 + + +Configuration & Management utility download +------------------------------------------- + +The latest driver configuration & management utility for 3.0.2.2 bfa driver can +be found at: + +http://www.brocade.com/services-support/drivers-downloads/adapters/Linux.page + +and then click following respective util pacakge link + + Version Link + + v3.0.2.0 Linux Adapter Firmware package for RHEL 6.2, SLES 11SP2 + + +Documentation +------------- + +The latest Administration's Guide, Installation and Reference Manual, +Troubleshooting Guide, and Release Notes for the corresponding out-of-box +driver can be found at: + +http://www.brocade.com/services-support/drivers-downloads/adapters/Linux.page + +and use the following inbox and out-of-box driver version mapping to find +the corresponding documentation: + + Inbox Version Out-of-box Version + + v3.0.2.2 v3.0.0.0 + + +Support +------- + +For general product and support info, go to the Brocade website at: + +http://www.brocade.com/services-support/index.page diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/bnx2fc.txt b/Documentation/scsi/bnx2fc.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..80823556d62 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/bnx2fc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +Operating FCoE using bnx2fc +=========================== +Broadcom FCoE offload through bnx2fc is full stateful hardware offload that +cooperates with all interfaces provided by the Linux ecosystem for FC/FCoE and +SCSI controllers. As such, FCoE functionality, once enabled is largely +transparent. Devices discovered on the SAN will be registered and unregistered +automatically with the upper storage layers. + +Despite the fact that the Broadcom's FCoE offload is fully offloaded, it does +depend on the state of the network interfaces to operate. As such, the network +interface (e.g. eth0) associated with the FCoE offload initiator must be 'up'. +It is recommended that the network interfaces be configured to be brought up +automatically at boot time. + +Furthermore, the Broadcom FCoE offload solution creates VLAN interfaces to +support the VLANs that have been discovered for FCoE operation (e.g. +eth0.1001-fcoe). Do not delete or disable these interfaces or FCoE operation +will be disrupted. + +Driver Usage Model: +=================== + +1. Ensure that fcoe-utils package is installed. + +2. Configure the interfaces on which bnx2fc driver has to operate on. +Here are the steps to configure: + a. cd /etc/fcoe + b. copy cfg-ethx to cfg-eth5 if FCoE has to be enabled on eth5. + c. Repeat this for all the interfaces where FCoE has to be enabled. + d. Edit all the cfg-eth files to set "no" for DCB_REQUIRED** field, and + "yes" for AUTO_VLAN. + e. Other configuration parameters should be left as default + +3. Ensure that "bnx2fc" is in SUPPORTED_DRIVERS list in /etc/fcoe/config. + +4. Start fcoe service. (service fcoe start). If Broadcom devices are present in +the system, bnx2fc driver would automatically claim the interfaces, starts vlan +discovery and log into the targets. + +5. "Symbolic Name" in 'fcoeadm -i' output would display if bnx2fc has claimed +the interface. +Eg: +[root@bh2 ~]# fcoeadm -i + Description: NetXtreme II BCM57712 10 Gigabit Ethernet + Revision: 01 + Manufacturer: Broadcom Corporation + Serial Number: 0010186FD558 + Driver: bnx2x 1.70.00-0 + Number of Ports: 2 + + Symbolic Name: bnx2fc v1.0.5 over eth5.4 + OS Device Name: host11 + Node Name: 0x10000010186FD559 + Port Name: 0x20000010186FD559 + FabricName: 0x2001000DECB3B681 + Speed: 10 Gbit + Supported Speed: 10 Gbit + MaxFrameSize: 2048 + FC-ID (Port ID): 0x0F0377 + State: Online + +6. Verify the vlan discovery is performed by running ifconfig and notice +<INTERFACE>.<VLAN>-fcoe interfaces are automatically created. + +Refer to fcoeadm manpage for more information on fcoeadm operations to +create/destroy interfaces or to display lun/target information. + +NOTE: +==== +** Broadcom FCoE capable devices implement a DCBX/LLDP client on-chip. Only one +LLDP client is allowed per interface. For proper operation all host software +based DCBX/LLDP clients (e.g. lldpad) must be disabled. To disable lldpad on a +given interface, run the following command: + +lldptool set-lldp -i <interface_name> adminStatus=disabled diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/cpqfc.txt b/Documentation/scsi/cpqfc.txt deleted file mode 100644 index dd33e61c064..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/scsi/cpqfc.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,272 +0,0 @@ -Notes for CPQFCTS driver for Compaq Tachyon TS -Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapter, PCI 64-bit, 66MHz -for Linux (RH 6.1, 6.2 kernel 2.2.12-32, 2.2.14-5) -SMP tested -Tested in single and dual HBA configuration, 32 and 64bit busses, -33 and 66MHz. Only supports FC-AL. -SEST size 512 Exchanges (simultaneous I/Os) limited by module kmalloc() - max of 128k bytes contiguous. - -Ver 2.5.4 Oct 03, 2002 - * fixed memcpy of sense buffer in ioctl to copy the smaller defined size -Ver 2.5.3 Aug 01, 2002 - * fix the passthru ioctl to handle the Scsi_Cmnd->request being a pointer -Ver 2.5.1 Jul 30, 2002 - * fix ioctl to pay attention to the specified LUN. -Ver 2.5.0 Nov 29, 2001 - * eliminated io_request_lock. This change makes the driver specific - to the 2.5.x kernels. - * silenced excessively noisy printks. - -Ver 2.1.2 July 23, 2002 - * initialize DumCmnd->lun in cpqfcTS_ioctl (used in fcFindLoggedInPorts as LUN index) - -Ver 2.1.1 Oct 18, 2001 - * reinitialize Cmnd->SCp.sent_command (used to identify commands as - passthrus) on calling scsi_done, since the scsi mid layer does not - use (or reinitialize) this field to prevent subsequent comands from - having it set incorrectly. - -Ver 2.1.0 Aug 27, 2001 - * Revise driver to use new kernel 2.4.x PCI DMA API, instead of - virt_to_bus(). (enables driver to work w/ ia64 systems with >2Gb RAM.) - Rework main scatter-gather code to handle cases where SG element - lengths are larger than 0x7FFFF bytes and use as many scatter - gather pages as necessary. (Steve Cameron) - * Makefile changes to bring cpqfc into line w/ rest of SCSI drivers - (thanks to Keith Owens) - -Ver 2.0.5 Aug 06, 2001 - * Reject non-existent luns in the driver rather than letting the - hardware do it. (some HW behaves differently than others in this area.) - * Changed Makefile to rely on "make dep" instead of explicit dependencies - * ifdef'ed out fibre channel analyzer triggering debug code - * fixed a jiffies wrapping issue - -Ver 2.0.4 Aug 01, 2001 - * Incorporated fix for target device reset from Steeleye - * Fixed passthrough ioctl so it doesn't hang. - * Fixed hang in launch_FCworker_thread() that occurred on some machines. - * Avoid problem when number of volumes in a single cabinet > 8 - -Ver 2.0.2 July 23, 2001 - Changed the semiphore changes so the driver would compile in 2.4.7. - This version is for 2.4.7 and beyond. - -Ver 2.0.1 May 7, 2001 - Merged version 1.3.6 fixes into version 2.0.0. - -Ver 2.0.0 May 7, 2001 - Fixed problem so spinlock is being initialized to UNLOCKED. - Fixed updated driver so it compiles in the 2.4 tree. - - Ver 1.3.6 Feb 27, 2001 - Added Target_Device_Reset function for SCSI error handling - Fixed problem with not reseting addressing mode after implicit logout - - -Ver 1.3.4 Sep 7, 2000 - Added Modinfo information - Fixed problem with statically linking the driver - -Ver 1.3.3, Aug 23, 2000 - Fixed device/function number in ioctl - -Ver 1.3.2, July 27, 2000 - Add include for Alpha compile on 2.2.14 kernel (cpq*i2c.c) - Change logic for different FCP-RSP sense_buffer location for HSG80 target - And search for Agilent Tachyon XL2 HBAs (not finished! - in test) - -Tested with -(storage): - Compaq RA-4x000, RAID firmware ver 2.40 - 2.54 - Seagate FC drives model ST39102FC, rev 0006 - Hitachi DK31CJ-72FC rev J8A8 - IBM DDYF-T18350R rev F60K - Compaq FC-SCSI bridge w/ DLT 35/70 Gb DLT (tape) -(servers): - Compaq PL-1850R - Compaq PL-6500 Xeon (400MHz) - Compaq PL-8500 (500MHz, 66MHz, 64bit PCI) - Compaq Alpha DS20 (RH 6.1) -(hubs): - Vixel Rapport 1000 (7-port "dumb") - Gadzoox Gibralter (12-port "dumb") - Gadzoox Capellix 2000, 3000 -(switches): - Brocade 2010, 2400, 2800, rev 2.0.3a (& later) - Gadzoox 3210 (Fabric blade beta) - Vixel 7100 (Fabric beta firmare - known hot plug issues) -using "qa_test" (esp. io_test script) suite modified from Unix tests. - -Installation: -make menuconfig - (select SCSI low-level, Compaq FC HBA) -make modules -make modules_install - -e.g. insmod -f cpqfc - -Due to Fabric/switch delays, driver requires 4 seconds -to initialize. If adapters are found, there will be a entries at -/proc/scsi/cpqfcTS/* - -sample contents of startup messages - -************************* - scsi_register allocating 3596 bytes for CPQFCHBA - ioremap'd Membase: c887e600 - HBA Tachyon RevId 1.2 -Allocating 119808 for 576 Exchanges @ c0dc0000 -Allocating 112904 for LinkQ @ c0c20000 (576 elements) -Allocating 110600 for TachSEST for 512 Exchanges - cpqfcTS: writing IMQ BASE 7C0000h PI 7C4000h - cpqfcTS: SEST c0e40000(virt): Wrote base E40000h @ c887e740 -cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000E8h WWN: 500507650642499D SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/0 -cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000EFh WWN: 50000E100000D5A6 SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/1 -cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000E4h WWN: 21000020370097BB SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/2 -cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000E2h WWN: 2100002037009946 SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/3 -cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000E1h WWN: 21000020370098FE SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/4 -cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000E0h WWN: 21000020370097B2 SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/5 -cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000DCh WWN: 2100002037006CC1 SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/6 -cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000DAh WWN: 21000020370059F6 SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/7 -cpqfcTS: New FC port 00000Fh WWN: 500805F1FADB0E20 SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/8 -cpqfcTS: New FC port 000008h WWN: 500805F1FADB0EBA SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/9 -cpqfcTS: New FC port 000004h WWN: 500805F1FADB1EB9 SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/10 -cpqfcTS: New FC port 000002h WWN: 500805F1FADB1ADE SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/11 -cpqfcTS: New FC port 000001h WWN: 500805F1FADBA2CA SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/12 -scsi4 : Compaq FibreChannel HBA Tachyon TS HPFC-5166A/1.2: WWN 500508B200193F50 - on PCI bus 0 device 0xa0fc irq 5 IObaseL 0x3400, MEMBASE 0xc6ef8600 -PCI bus width 32 bits, bus speed 33 MHz -FCP-SCSI Driver v1.3.0 -GBIC detected: Short-wave. LPSM 0h Monitor -scsi : 5 hosts. - Vendor: IBM Model: DDYF-T18350R Rev: F60K - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 03 -Detected scsi disk sdb at scsi4, channel 0, id 0, lun 0 - Vendor: HITACHI Model: DK31CJ-72FC Rev: J8A8 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdc at scsi4, channel 0, id 1, lun 0 - Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST39102FC Rev: 0006 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdd at scsi4, channel 0, id 2, lun 0 - Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST39102FC Rev: 0006 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sde at scsi4, channel 0, id 3, lun 0 - Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST39102FC Rev: 0006 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdf at scsi4, channel 0, id 4, lun 0 - Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST39102FC Rev: 0006 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdg at scsi4, channel 0, id 5, lun 0 - Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST39102FC Rev: 0006 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdh at scsi4, channel 0, id 6, lun 0 - Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST39102FC Rev: 0006 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdi at scsi4, channel 0, id 7, lun 0 - Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.48 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdj at scsi4, channel 0, id 8, lun 0 - Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.48 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdk at scsi4, channel 0, id 8, lun 1 - Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.40 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdl at scsi4, channel 0, id 9, lun 0 - Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.40 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdm at scsi4, channel 0, id 9, lun 1 - Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.54 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdn at scsi4, channel 0, id 10, lun 0 - Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.54 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdo at scsi4, channel 0, id 11, lun 0 - Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.54 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdp at scsi4, channel 0, id 11, lun 1 - Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.54 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdq at scsi4, channel 0, id 12, lun 0 - Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.54 - Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 -Detected scsi disk sdr at scsi4, channel 0, id 12, lun 1 -resize_dma_pool: unknown device type 12 -resize_dma_pool: unknown device type 12 -SCSI device sdb: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 35843670 [17501 MB] [17.5 GB] - sdb: sdb1 -SCSI device sdc: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 144410880 [70513 MB] [70.5 GB] - sdc: sdc1 -SCSI device sdd: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17783240 [8683 MB] [8.7 GB] - sdd: sdd1 -SCSI device sde: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17783240 [8683 MB] [8.7 GB] - sde: sde1 -SCSI device sdf: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17783240 [8683 MB] [8.7 GB] - sdf: sdf1 -SCSI device sdg: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17783240 [8683 MB] [8.7 GB] - sdg: sdg1 -SCSI device sdh: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17783240 [8683 MB] [8.7 GB] - sdh: sdh1 -SCSI device sdi: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17783240 [8683 MB] [8.7 GB] - sdi: sdi1 -SCSI device sdj: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 2056160 [1003 MB] [1.0 GB] - sdj: sdj1 -SCSI device sdk: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 2052736 [1002 MB] [1.0 GB] - sdk: sdk1 -SCSI device sdl: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17764320 [8673 MB] [8.7 GB] - sdl: sdl1 -SCSI device sdm: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 8380320 [4091 MB] [4.1 GB] - sdm: sdm1 -SCSI device sdn: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17764320 [8673 MB] [8.7 GB] - sdn: sdn1 -SCSI device sdo: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17764320 [8673 MB] [8.7 GB] - sdo: sdo1 -SCSI device sdp: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17764320 [8673 MB] [8.7 GB] - sdp: sdp1 -SCSI device sdq: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 2056160 [1003 MB] [1.0 GB] - sdq: sdq1 -SCSI device sdr: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 2052736 [1002 MB] [1.0 GB] - sdr: sdr1 - -************************* - -If a GBIC of type Short-wave, Long-wave, or Copper is detected, it will -print out; otherwise, "none" is displayed. If the cabling is correct -and a loop circuit is completed, you should see "Monitor"; otherwise, -"LoopFail" (on open circuit) or some LPSM number/state with bit 3 set. - - -ERRATA: -1. Normally, Linux Scsi queries FC devices with INQUIRY strings. All LUNs -found according to INQUIRY should get READ commands at sector 0 to find -partition table, etc. Older kernels only query the first 4 devices. Some -Linux kernels only look for one LUN per target (i.e. FC device). - -2. Physically removing a device, or a malfunctioning system which hides a -device, leads to a 30-second timeout and subsequent _abort call. -In some process contexts, this will hang the kernel (crashing the system). -Single bit errors in frames and virtually all hot plugging events are -gracefully handled with internal driver timer and Abort processing. - -3. Some SCSI drives with error conditions will not handle the 7 second timeout -in this software driver, leading to infinite retries on timed out SCSI commands. -The 7 secs balances the need to quickly recover from lost frames (esp. on sequence -initiatives) and time needed by older/slower/error-state drives in responding. -This can be easily changed in "Exchanges[].timeOut". - -4. Due to the nature of FC soft addressing, there is no assurance that the -same LUNs (drives) will have the same path (e.g. /dev/sdb1) from one boot to -next. Dynamic soft address changes (i.e. 24-bit FC port_id) are -supported during run time (e.g. due to hot plug event) by the use of WWN to -SCSI Nexus (channel/target/LUN) mapping. - -5. Compaq RA4x00 firmware version 2.54 and later supports SSP (Selective -Storage Presentation), which maps LUNs to a WWN. If RA4x00 firmware prior -2.54 (e.g. older controller) is used, or the FC HBA is replaced (another WWN -is used), logical volumes on the RA4x00 will no longer be visible. - - -Send questions/comments to: -Amy Vanzant-Hodge (fibrechannel@compaq.com) - diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/cxgb3i.txt b/Documentation/scsi/cxgb3i.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7ac8032ee9b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/cxgb3i.txt @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +Chelsio S3 iSCSI Driver for Linux + +Introduction +============ + +The Chelsio T3 ASIC based Adapters (S310, S320, S302, S304, Mezz cards, etc. +series of products) support iSCSI acceleration and iSCSI Direct Data Placement +(DDP) where the hardware handles the expensive byte touching operations, such +as CRC computation and verification, and direct DMA to the final host memory +destination: + + - iSCSI PDU digest generation and verification + + On transmitting, Chelsio S3 h/w computes and inserts the Header and + Data digest into the PDUs. + On receiving, Chelsio S3 h/w computes and verifies the Header and + Data digest of the PDUs. + + - Direct Data Placement (DDP) + + S3 h/w can directly place the iSCSI Data-In or Data-Out PDU's + payload into pre-posted final destination host-memory buffers based + on the Initiator Task Tag (ITT) in Data-In or Target Task Tag (TTT) + in Data-Out PDUs. + + - PDU Transmit and Recovery + + On transmitting, S3 h/w accepts the complete PDU (header + data) + from the host driver, computes and inserts the digests, decomposes + the PDU into multiple TCP segments if necessary, and transmit all + the TCP segments onto the wire. It handles TCP retransmission if + needed. + + On receiving, S3 h/w recovers the iSCSI PDU by reassembling TCP + segments, separating the header and data, calculating and verifying + the digests, then forwarding the header to the host. The payload data, + if possible, will be directly placed into the pre-posted host DDP + buffer. Otherwise, the payload data will be sent to the host too. + +The cxgb3i driver interfaces with open-iscsi initiator and provides the iSCSI +acceleration through Chelsio hardware wherever applicable. + +Using the cxgb3i Driver +======================= + +The following steps need to be taken to accelerates the open-iscsi initiator: + +1. Load the cxgb3i driver: "modprobe cxgb3i" + + The cxgb3i module registers a new transport class "cxgb3i" with open-iscsi. + + * in the case of recompiling the kernel, the cxgb3i selection is located at + Device Drivers + SCSI device support ---> + [*] SCSI low-level drivers ---> + <M> Chelsio S3xx iSCSI support + +2. Create an interface file located under /etc/iscsi/ifaces/ for the new + transport class "cxgb3i". + + The content of the file should be in the following format: + iface.transport_name = cxgb3i + iface.net_ifacename = <ethX> + iface.ipaddress = <iscsi ip address> + + * if iface.ipaddress is specified, <iscsi ip address> needs to be either the + same as the ethX's ip address or an address on the same subnet. Make + sure the ip address is unique in the network. + +3. edit /etc/iscsi/iscsid.conf + The default setting for MaxRecvDataSegmentLength (131072) is too big; + replace with a value no bigger than 15360 (for example 8192): + + node.conn[0].iscsi.MaxRecvDataSegmentLength = 8192 + + * The login would fail for a normal session if MaxRecvDataSegmentLength is + too big. A error message in the format of + "cxgb3i: ERR! MaxRecvSegmentLength <X> too big. Need to be <= <Y>." + would be logged to dmesg. + +4. To direct open-iscsi traffic to go through cxgb3i's accelerated path, + "-I <iface file name>" option needs to be specified with most of the + iscsiadm command. <iface file name> is the transport interface file created + in step 2. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/dc395x.txt b/Documentation/scsi/dc395x.txt index ae3b79a2d27..88219f96633 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/dc395x.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/dc395x.txt @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ Parameters ---------- The driver uses the settings from the EEPROM set in the SCSI BIOS setup. If there is no EEPROM, the driver uses default values. -Both can be overriden by command line parameters (module or kernel +Both can be overridden by command line parameters (module or kernel parameters). The following parameters are available: diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/dpti.txt b/Documentation/scsi/dpti.txt index 6e45e70243e..f36dc0e7c8d 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/dpti.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/dpti.txt @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ * Implemented suggestions from Alan Cox * Added calculation of resid for sg layer * Better error handling - * Added checking underflow condtions + * Added checking underflow conditions * Added DATAPROTECT checking * Changed error return codes * Fixed pointer bug in bus reset routine diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/dtc3x80.txt b/Documentation/scsi/dtc3x80.txt index e8ae6230ab3..1d7af9f9a8e 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/dtc3x80.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/dtc3x80.txt @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ The 3180 does not. Otherwise, they are identical. The DTC3x80 does not support DMA but it does have Pseudo-DMA which is supported by the driver. -It's DTC406 scsi chip is supposedly compatible with the NCR 53C400. +Its DTC406 scsi chip is supposedly compatible with the NCR 53C400. It is memory mapped, uses an IRQ, but no dma or io-port. There is internal DMA, between SCSI bus and an on-chip 128-byte buffer. Double buffering is done automagically by the chip. Data is transferred diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt b/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..891435a72fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + +HPSA - Hewlett Packard Smart Array driver +----------------------------------------- + +This file describes the hpsa SCSI driver for HP Smart Array controllers. +The hpsa driver is intended to supplant the cciss driver for newer +Smart Array controllers. The hpsa driver is a SCSI driver, while the +cciss driver is a "block" driver. Actually cciss is both a block +driver (for logical drives) AND a SCSI driver (for tape drives). This +"split-brained" design of the cciss driver is a source of excess +complexity and eliminating that complexity is one of the reasons +for hpsa to exist. + +Supported devices: +------------------ + +Smart Array P212 +Smart Array P410 +Smart Array P410i +Smart Array P411 +Smart Array P812 +Smart Array P712m +Smart Array P711m +StorageWorks P1210m + +Additionally, older Smart Arrays may work with the hpsa driver if the kernel +boot parameter "hpsa_allow_any=1" is specified, however these are not tested +nor supported by HP with this driver. For older Smart Arrays, the cciss +driver should still be used. + +The "hpsa_simple_mode=1" boot parameter may be used to prevent the driver from +putting the controller into "performant" mode. The difference is that with simple +mode, each command completion requires an interrupt, while with "performant mode" +(the default, and ordinarily better performing) it is possible to have multiple +command completions indicated by a single interrupt. + +HPSA specific entries in /sys +----------------------------- + + In addition to the generic SCSI attributes available in /sys, hpsa supports + the following attributes: + + HPSA specific host attributes: + ------------------------------ + + /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/rescan + /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/firmware_revision + /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/resettable + /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/transport_mode + + the host "rescan" attribute is a write only attribute. Writing to this + attribute will cause the driver to scan for new, changed, or removed devices + (e.g. hot-plugged tape drives, or newly configured or deleted logical drives, + etc.) and notify the SCSI midlayer of any changes detected. Normally this is + triggered automatically by HP's Array Configuration Utility (either the GUI or + command line variety) so for logical drive changes, the user should not + normally have to use this. It may be useful when hot plugging devices like + tape drives, or entire storage boxes containing pre-configured logical drives. + + The "firmware_revision" attribute contains the firmware version of the Smart Array. + For example: + + root@host:/sys/class/scsi_host/host4# cat firmware_revision + 7.14 + + The transport_mode indicates whether the controller is in "performant" + or "simple" mode. This is controlled by the "hpsa_simple_mode" module + parameter. + + The "resettable" read-only attribute indicates whether a particular + controller is able to honor the "reset_devices" kernel parameter. If the + device is resettable, this file will contain a "1", otherwise, a "0". This + parameter is used by kdump, for example, to reset the controller at driver + load time to eliminate any outstanding commands on the controller and get the + controller into a known state so that the kdump initiated i/o will work right + and not be disrupted in any way by stale commands or other stale state + remaining on the controller from the previous kernel. This attribute enables + kexec tools to warn the user if they attempt to designate a device which is + unable to honor the reset_devices kernel parameter as a dump device. + + HPSA specific disk attributes: + ------------------------------ + + /sys/class/scsi_disk/c:b:t:l/device/unique_id + /sys/class/scsi_disk/c:b:t:l/device/raid_level + /sys/class/scsi_disk/c:b:t:l/device/lunid + + (where c:b:t:l are the controller, bus, target and lun of the device) + + For example: + + root@host:/sys/class/scsi_disk/4:0:0:0/device# cat unique_id + 600508B1001044395355323037570F77 + root@host:/sys/class/scsi_disk/4:0:0:0/device# cat lunid + 0x0000004000000000 + root@host:/sys/class/scsi_disk/4:0:0:0/device# cat raid_level + RAID 0 + +HPSA specific ioctls: +--------------------- + + For compatibility with applications written for the cciss driver, many, but + not all of the ioctls supported by the cciss driver are also supported by the + hpsa driver. The data structures used by these are described in + include/linux/cciss_ioctl.h + + CCISS_DEREGDISK + CCISS_REGNEWDISK + CCISS_REGNEWD + + The above three ioctls all do exactly the same thing, which is to cause the driver + to rescan for new devices. This does exactly the same thing as writing to the + hpsa specific host "rescan" attribute. + + CCISS_GETPCIINFO + + Returns PCI domain, bus, device and function and "board ID" (PCI subsystem ID). + + CCISS_GETDRIVVER + + Returns driver version in three bytes encoded as: + (major_version << 16) | (minor_version << 8) | (subminor_version) + + CCISS_PASSTHRU + CCISS_BIG_PASSTHRU + + Allows "BMIC" and "CISS" commands to be passed through to the Smart Array. + These are used extensively by the HP Array Configuration Utility, SNMP storage + agents, etc. See cciss_vol_status at http://cciss.sf.net for some examples. + diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/hptiop.txt b/Documentation/scsi/hptiop.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..12ecfd308e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/hptiop.txt @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ +HIGHPOINT ROCKETRAID 3xxx/4xxx ADAPTER DRIVER (hptiop) + +Controller Register Map +------------------------- + +For RR44xx Intel IOP based adapters, the controller IOP is accessed via PCI BAR0 and BAR2: + + BAR0 offset Register + 0x11C5C Link Interface IRQ Set + 0x11C60 Link Interface IRQ Clear + + BAR2 offset Register + 0x10 Inbound Message Register 0 + 0x14 Inbound Message Register 1 + 0x18 Outbound Message Register 0 + 0x1C Outbound Message Register 1 + 0x20 Inbound Doorbell Register + 0x24 Inbound Interrupt Status Register + 0x28 Inbound Interrupt Mask Register + 0x30 Outbound Interrupt Status Register + 0x34 Outbound Interrupt Mask Register + 0x40 Inbound Queue Port + 0x44 Outbound Queue Port + +For Intel IOP based adapters, the controller IOP is accessed via PCI BAR0: + + BAR0 offset Register + 0x10 Inbound Message Register 0 + 0x14 Inbound Message Register 1 + 0x18 Outbound Message Register 0 + 0x1C Outbound Message Register 1 + 0x20 Inbound Doorbell Register + 0x24 Inbound Interrupt Status Register + 0x28 Inbound Interrupt Mask Register + 0x30 Outbound Interrupt Status Register + 0x34 Outbound Interrupt Mask Register + 0x40 Inbound Queue Port + 0x44 Outbound Queue Port + +For Marvell not Frey IOP based adapters, the IOP is accessed via PCI BAR0 and BAR1: + + BAR0 offset Register + 0x20400 Inbound Doorbell Register + 0x20404 Inbound Interrupt Mask Register + 0x20408 Outbound Doorbell Register + 0x2040C Outbound Interrupt Mask Register + + BAR1 offset Register + 0x0 Inbound Queue Head Pointer + 0x4 Inbound Queue Tail Pointer + 0x8 Outbound Queue Head Pointer + 0xC Outbound Queue Tail Pointer + 0x10 Inbound Message Register + 0x14 Outbound Message Register + 0x40-0x1040 Inbound Queue + 0x1040-0x2040 Outbound Queue + +For Marvell Frey IOP based adapters, the IOP is accessed via PCI BAR0 and BAR1: + + BAR0 offset Register + 0x0 IOP configuration information. + + BAR1 offset Register + 0x4000 Inbound List Base Address Low + 0x4004 Inbound List Base Address High + 0x4018 Inbound List Write Pointer + 0x402C Inbound List Configuration and Control + 0x4050 Outbound List Base Address Low + 0x4054 Outbound List Base Address High + 0x4058 Outbound List Copy Pointer Shadow Base Address Low + 0x405C Outbound List Copy Pointer Shadow Base Address High + 0x4088 Outbound List Interrupt Cause + 0x408C Outbound List Interrupt Enable + 0x1020C PCIe Function 0 Interrupt Enable + 0x10400 PCIe Function 0 to CPU Message A + 0x10420 CPU to PCIe Function 0 Message A + 0x10480 CPU to PCIe Function 0 Doorbell + 0x10484 CPU to PCIe Function 0 Doorbell Enable + + +I/O Request Workflow of Not Marvell Frey +------------------------------------------ + +All queued requests are handled via inbound/outbound queue port. +A request packet can be allocated in either IOP or host memory. + +To send a request to the controller: + + - Get a free request packet by reading the inbound queue port or + allocate a free request in host DMA coherent memory. + + The value returned from the inbound queue port is an offset + relative to the IOP BAR0. + + Requests allocated in host memory must be aligned on 32-bytes boundary. + + - Fill the packet. + + - Post the packet to IOP by writing it to inbound queue. For requests + allocated in IOP memory, write the offset to inbound queue port. For + requests allocated in host memory, write (0x80000000|(bus_addr>>5)) + to the inbound queue port. + + - The IOP process the request. When the request is completed, it + will be put into outbound queue. An outbound interrupt will be + generated. + + For requests allocated in IOP memory, the request offset is posted to + outbound queue. + + For requests allocated in host memory, (0x80000000|(bus_addr>>5)) + is posted to the outbound queue. If IOP_REQUEST_FLAG_OUTPUT_CONTEXT + flag is set in the request, the low 32-bit context value will be + posted instead. + + - The host read the outbound queue and complete the request. + + For requests allocated in IOP memory, the host driver free the request + by writing it to the outbound queue. + +Non-queued requests (reset/flush etc) can be sent via inbound message +register 0. An outbound message with the same value indicates the completion +of an inbound message. + + +I/O Request Workflow of Marvell Frey +-------------------------------------- + +All queued requests are handled via inbound/outbound list. + +To send a request to the controller: + + - Allocate a free request in host DMA coherent memory. + + Requests allocated in host memory must be aligned on 32-bytes boundary. + + - Fill the request with index of the request in the flag. + + Fill a free inbound list unit with the physical address and the size of + the request. + + Set up the inbound list write pointer with the index of previous unit, + round to 0 if the index reaches the supported count of requests. + + - Post the inbound list writer pointer to IOP. + + - The IOP process the request. When the request is completed, the flag of + the request with or-ed IOPMU_QUEUE_MASK_HOST_BITS will be put into a + free outbound list unit and the index of the outbound list unit will be + put into the copy pointer shadow register. An outbound interrupt will be + generated. + + - The host read the outbound list copy pointer shadow register and compare + with previous saved read pointer N. If they are different, the host will + read the (N+1)th outbound list unit. + + The host get the index of the request from the (N+1)th outbound list + unit and complete the request. + +Non-queued requests (reset communication/reset/flush etc) can be sent via PCIe +Function 0 to CPU Message A register. The CPU to PCIe Function 0 Message register +with the same value indicates the completion of message. + + +User-level Interface +--------------------- + +The driver exposes following sysfs attributes: + + NAME R/W Description + driver-version R driver version string + firmware-version R firmware version string + + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Copyright (C) 2006-2012 HighPoint Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved. + + This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + linux@highpoint-tech.com + http://www.highpoint-tech.com diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt deleted file mode 100644 index d16ce5b540f..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1402 +0,0 @@ - - -=< The IBM Microchannel SCSI-Subsystem >=- - - for the IBM PS/2 series - - Low Level Software-Driver for Linux - - Copyright (c) 1995 Strom Systems, Inc. under the terms of the GNU - General Public License. Originally written by Martin Kolinek, December 1995. - Officially modified and maintained by Michael Lang since January 1999. - - Version 4.0a - - Last update: January 3, 2001 - - Before you Start - ---------------- - This is the common README.ibmmca file for all driver releases of the - IBM MCA SCSI driver for Linux. Please note, that driver releases 4.0 - or newer do not work with kernel versions older than 2.4.0, while driver - versions older than 4.0 do not work with kernels 2.4.0 or later! If you - try to compile your kernel with the wrong driver source, the - compilation is aborted and you get a corresponding error message. This is - no bug in the driver. It prevents you from using the wrong sourcecode - with the wrong kernel version. - - Authors of this Driver - ---------------------- - - Chris Beauregard (improvement of the SCSI-device mapping by the driver) - - Martin Kolinek (origin, first release of this driver) - - Klaus Kudielka (multiple SCSI-host management/detection, adaption to - Linux Kernel 2.1.x, module support) - - Michael Lang (assigning original pun/lun mapping, dynamical ldn - assignment, rewritten adapter detection, this file, - patches, official driver maintenance and subsequent - debugging, related with the driver) - - Table of Contents - ----------------- - 1 Abstract - 2 Driver Description - 2.1 IBM SCSI-Subsystem Detection - 2.2 Physical Units, Logical Units, and Logical Devices - 2.3 SCSI-Device Recognition and dynamical ldn Assignment - 2.4 SCSI-Device Order - 2.5 Regular SCSI-Command-Processing - 2.6 Abort & Reset Commands - 2.7 Disk Geometry - 2.8 Kernel Boot Option - 2.9 Driver Module Support - 2.10 Multiple Hostadapter Support - 2.11 /proc/scsi-Filesystem Information - 2.12 /proc/mca-Filesystem Information - 2.13 Supported IBM SCSI-Subsystems - 2.14 Linux Kernel Versions - 3 Code History - 4 To do - 5 Users' Manual - 5.1 Commandline Parameters - 5.2 Troubleshooting - 5.3 Bugreports - 5.4 Support WWW-page - 6 References - 7 Credits to - 7.1 People - 7.2 Sponsors & Supporters - 8 Trademarks - 9 Disclaimer - - * * * - - 1 Abstract - ---------- - This README-file describes the IBM SCSI-subsystem low level driver for - Linux. The descriptions which were formerly kept in the source-code have - been taken out to this file to easify the codes' readability. The driver - description has been updated, as most of the former description was already - quite outdated. The history of the driver development is also kept inside - here. Multiple historical developments have been summarized to shorten the - textsize a bit. At the end of this file you can find a small manual for - this driver and hints to get it running on your machine. - - 2 Driver Description - -------------------- - 2.1 IBM SCSI-Subsystem Detection - -------------------------------- - This is done in the ibmmca_detect() function. It first checks, if the - Microchannel-bus support is enabled, as the IBM SCSI-subsystem needs the - Microchannel. In a next step, a free interrupt is chosen and the main - interrupt handler is connected to it to handle answers of the SCSI- - subsystem(s). If the F/W SCSI-adapter is forced by the BIOS to use IRQ11 - instead of IRQ14, IRQ11 is used for the IBM SCSI-2 F/W adapter. In a - further step it is checked, if the adapter gets detected by force from - the kernel commandline, where the I/O port and the SCSI-subsystem id can - be specified. The next step checks if there is an integrated SCSI-subsystem - installed. This register area is fixed through all IBM PS/2 MCA-machines - and appears as something like a virtual slot 10 of the MCA-bus. On most - PS/2 machines, the POS registers of slot 10 are set to 0xff or 0x00 if not - integrated SCSI-controller is available. But on certain PS/2s, like model - 9595, this slot 10 is used to store other information which at earlier - stage confused the driver and resulted in the detection of some ghost-SCSI. - If POS-register 2 and 3 are not 0x00 and not 0xff, but all other POS - registers are either 0xff or 0x00, there must be an integrated SCSI- - subsystem present and it will be registered as IBM Integrated SCSI- - Subsystem. The next step checks, if there is a slot-adapter installed on - the MCA-bus. To get this, the first two POS-registers, that represent the - adapter ID are checked. If they fit to one of the ids, stored in the - adapter list, a SCSI-subsystem is assumed to be found in a slot and will be - registered. This check is done through all possible MCA-bus slots to allow - more than one SCSI-adapter to be present in the PS/2-system and this is - already the first point of problems. Looking into the technical reference - manual for the IBM PS/2 common interfaces, the POS2 register must have - different interpretation of its single bits to avoid overlapping I/O - regions. While one can assume, that the integrated subsystem has a fix - I/O-address at 0x3540 - 0x3547, further installed IBM SCSI-adapters must - use a different I/O-address. This is expressed by bit 1 to 3 of POS2 - (multiplied by 8 + 0x3540). Bits 2 and 3 are reserved for the integrated - subsystem, but not for the adapters! The following list shows, how the - bits of POS2 and POS3 should be interpreted. - - The POS2-register of all PS/2 models' integrated SCSI-subsystems has the - following interpretation of bits: - Bit 7 - 4 : Chip Revision ID (Release) - Bit 3 - 2 : Reserved - Bit 1 : 8k NVRAM Disabled - Bit 0 : Chip Enable (EN-Signal) - The POS3-register is interpreted as follows (for most IBM SCSI-subsys.): - Bit 7 - 5 : SCSI ID - Bit 4 - 0 : Reserved = 0 - The slot-adapters have different interpretation of these bits. The IBM SCSI - adapter (w/Cache) and the IBM SCSI-2 F/W adapter use the following - interpretation of the POS2 register: - Bit 7 - 4 : ROM Segment Address Select - Bit 3 - 1 : Adapter I/O Address Select (*8+0x3540) - Bit 0 : Adapter Enable (EN-Signal) - and for the POS3 register: - Bit 7 - 5 : SCSI ID - Bit 4 : Fairness Enable (SCSI ID3 f. F/W) - Bit 3 - 0 : Arbitration Level - The most modern product of the series is the IBM SCSI-2 F/W adapter, it - allows dual-bus SCSI and SCSI-wide addressing, which means, PUNs may be - between 0 and 15. Here, Bit 4 is the high-order bit of the 4-bit wide - adapter PUN expression. In short words, this means, that IBM PS/2 machines - can only support 1 single integrated subsystem by default. Additional - slot-adapters get ports assigned by the automatic configuration tool. - - One day I found a patch in ibmmca_detect(), forcing the I/O-address to be - 0x3540 for integrated SCSI-subsystems, there was a remark placed, that on - integrated IBM SCSI-subsystems of model 56, the POS2 register was showing 5. - This means, that really for these models, POS2 has to be interpreted - sticking to the technical reference guide. In this case, the bit 2 (4) is - a reserved bit and may not be interpreted. These differences between the - adapters and the integrated controllers are taken into account by the - detection routine of the driver on from version >3.0g. - - Every time, a SCSI-subsystem is discovered, the ibmmca_register() function - is called. This function checks first, if the requested area for the I/O- - address of this SCSI-subsystem is still available and assigns this I/O- - area to the SCSI-subsystem. There are always 8 sequential I/O-addresses - taken for each individual SCSI-subsystem found, which are: - - Offset Type Permissions - 0 Command Interface Register 1 Read/Write - 1 Command Interface Register 2 Read/Write - 2 Command Interface Register 3 Read/Write - 3 Command Interface Register 4 Read/Write - 4 Attention Register Read/Write - 5 Basic Control Register Read/Write - 6 Interrupt Status Register Read - 7 Basic Status Register Read - - After the I/O-address range is assigned, the host-adapter is assigned - to a local structure which keeps all adapter information needed for the - driver itself and the mid- and higher-level SCSI-drivers. The SCSI pun/lun - and the adapters' ldn tables are initialized and get probed afterwards by - the check_devices() function. If no further adapters are found, - ibmmca_detect() quits. - - 2.2 Physical Units, Logical Units, and Logical Devices - ------------------------------------------------------ - There can be up to 56 devices on the SCSI bus (besides the adapter): - there are up to 7 "physical units" (each identified by physical unit - number or pun, also called the scsi id, this is the number you select - with hardware jumpers), and each physical unit can have up to 8 - "logical units" (each identified by logical unit number, or lun, - between 0 and 7). The IBM SCSI-2 F/W adapter offers this on up to two - busses and provides support for 30 logical devices at the same time, where - in wide-addressing mode you can have 16 puns with 32 luns on each device. - This section dexribes you the handling of devices on non-F/W adapters. - Just imagine, that you can have 16 * 32 = 512 devices on a F/W adapter - which means a lot of possible devices for such a small machine. - - Typically the adapter has pun=7, so puns of other physical units - are between 0 and 6(15). On a wide-adapter a pun higher than 7 is - possible, but is normally not used. Almost all physical units have only - one logical unit, with lun=0. A CD-ROM jukebox would be an example of a - physical unit with more than one logical unit. - - The embedded microprocessor of the IBM SCSI-subsystem hides the complex - two-dimensional (pun,lun) organization from the operating system. - When the machine is powered-up (or rebooted), the embedded microprocessor - checks, on its own, all 56 possible (pun,lun) combinations, and the first - 15 devices found are assigned into a one-dimensional array of so-called - "logical devices", identified by "logical device numbers" or ldn. The last - ldn=15 is reserved for the subsystem itself. Wide adapters may have - to check up to 15 * 8 = 120 pun/lun combinations. - - 2.3 SCSI-Device Recognition and Dynamical ldn Assignment - -------------------------------------------------------- - One consequence of information hiding is that the real (pun,lun) - numbers are also hidden. The two possibilities to get around this problem - is to offer fake pun/lun combinations to the operating system or to - delete the whole mapping of the adapter and to reassign the ldns, using - the immediate assign command of the SCSI-subsystem for probing through - all possible pun/lun combinations. a ldn is a "logical device number" - which is used by IBM SCSI-subsystems to access some valid SCSI-device. - At the beginning of the development of this driver, the following approach - was used: - - First, the driver checked the ldn's (0 to 6) to find out which ldn's - have devices assigned. This was done by the functions check_devices() and - device_exists(). The interrupt handler has a special paragraph of code - (see local_checking_phase_flag) to assist in the checking. Assume, for - example, that three logical devices were found assigned at ldn 0, 1, 2. - These are presented to the upper layer of Linux SCSI driver - as devices with bogus (pun, lun) equal to (0,0), (1,0), (2,0). - On the other hand, if the upper layer issues a command to device - say (4,0), this driver returns DID_NO_CONNECT error. - - In a second step of the driver development, the following improvement has - been applied: The first approach limited the number of devices to 7, far - fewer than the 15 that it could usem then it just maped ldn -> - (ldn/8,ldn%8) for pun,lun. We ended up with a real mishmash of puns - and luns, but it all seemed to work. - - The latest development, which is implemented from the driver version 3.0 - and later, realizes the device recognition in the following way: - The physical SCSI-devices on the SCSI-bus are probed via immediate_assign- - and device_inquiry-commands, that is all implemented in a completely new - made check_devices() subroutine. This delivers an exact map of the physical - SCSI-world that is now stored in the get_scsi[][]-array. This means, - that the once hidden pun,lun assignment is now known to this driver. - It no longer believes in default-settings of the subsystem and maps all - ldns to existing pun,lun "by foot". This assures full control of the ldn - mapping and allows dynamical remapping of ldns to different pun,lun, if - there are more SCSI-devices installed than ldns available (n>15). The - ldns from 0 to 6 get 'hardwired' by this driver to puns 0 to 7 at lun=0, - excluding the pun of the subsystem. This assures, that at least simple - SCSI-installations have optimum access-speed and are not touched by - dynamical remapping. The ldns 7 to 14 are put to existing devices with - lun>0 or to non-existing devices, in order to satisfy the subsystem, if - there are less than 15 SCSI-devices connected. In the case of more than 15 - devices, the dynamical mapping goes active. If the get_scsi[][] reports a - device to be existant, but it has no ldn assigned, it gets a ldn out of 7 - to 14. The numbers are assigned in cyclic order. Therefore it takes 8 - dynamical reassignments on the SCSI-devices, until a certain device - loses its ldn again. This assures, that dynamical remapping is avoided - during intense I/O between up to 15 SCSI-devices (means pun,lun - combinations). A further advantage of this method is, that people who - build their kernel without probing on all luns will get what they expect, - because the driver just won't assign everything with lun>0 when - multpile lun probing is inactive. - - 2.4 SCSI-Device Order - --------------------- - Because of the now correct recognition of physical pun,lun, and - their report to mid-level- and higher-level-drivers, the new reported puns - can be different from the old, faked puns. Therefore, Linux will eventually - change /dev/sdXXX assignments and prompt you for corrupted superblock - repair on boottime. In this case DO NOT PANIC, YOUR DISKS ARE STILL OK!!! - You have to reboot (CTRL-D) with an old kernel and set the /etc/fstab-file - entries right. After that, the system should come up as errorfree as before. - If your boot-partition is not coming up, also edit the /etc/lilo.conf-file - in a Linux session booted on old kernel and run lilo before reboot. Check - lilo.conf anyway to get boot on other partitions with foreign OSes right - again. But there exists a feature of this driver that allows you to change - the assignment order of the SCSI-devices by flipping the PUN-assignment. - See the next paragraph for a description. - - The problem for this is, that Linux does not assign the SCSI-devices in the - way as described in the ANSI-SCSI-standard. Linux assigns /dev/sda to - the device with at minimum id 0. But the first drive should be at id 6, - because for historical reasons, drive at id 6 has, by hardware, the highest - priority and a drive at id 0 the lowest. IBM was one of the rare producers, - where the BIOS assigns drives belonging to the ANSI-SCSI-standard. Most - other producers' BIOS does not (I think even Adaptec-BIOS). The - IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD flag, which you set while configuring the - kernel enables to choose the preferred way of SCSI-device-assignment. - Defining this flag would result in Linux determining the devices in the - same order as DOS and OS/2 does on your MCA-machine. This is also standard - on most industrial computers and OSes, like e.g. OS-9. Leaving this flag - undefined will get your devices ordered in the default way of Linux. See - also the remarks of Chris Beauregard from Dec 15, 1997 and the followups - in section 3. - - 2.5 Regular SCSI-Command-Processing - ----------------------------------- - Only three functions get involved: ibmmca_queuecommand(), issue_cmd(), - and interrupt_handler(). - - The upper layer issues a scsi command by calling function - ibmmca_queuecommand(). This function fills a "subsystem control block" - (scb) and calls a local function issue_cmd(), which writes a scb - command into subsystem I/O ports. Once the scb command is carried out, - the interrupt_handler() is invoked. If a device is determined to be - existant and it has not assigned any ldn, it gets one dynamically. - For this, the whole stuff is done in ibmmca_queuecommand(). - - 2.6 Abort & Reset Commands - -------------------------- - These are implemented with busy waiting for interrupt to arrive. - ibmmca_reset() and ibmmca_abort() do not work sufficently well - up to now and need still a lot of development work. But, this seems - to be even a problem with other SCSI-low level drivers, too. However, - this should be no excuse. - - 2.7 Disk Geometry - ----------------- - The ibmmca_biosparams() function should return the same disk geometry - as the bios. This is needed for fdisk, etc. The returned geometry is - certainly correct for disks smaller than 1 gigabyte. In the meantime, - it has been proved, that this works fine even with disks larger than - 1 gigabyte. - - 2.8 Kernel Boot Option - ---------------------- - The function ibmmca_scsi_setup() is called if option ibmmcascsi=n - is passed to the kernel. See file linux/init/main.c for details. - - 2.9 Driver Module Support - ------------------------- - Is implemented and tested by K. Kudielka. This could probably not work - on kernels <2.1.0. - - 2.10 Multiple Hostadapter Support - --------------------------------- - This driver supports up to eight interfaces of type IBM-SCSI-Subsystem. - Integrated-, and MCA-adapters are automatically recognized. Unrecognizable - IBM-SCSI-Subsystem interfaces can be specified as kernel-parameters. - - 2.11 /proc/scsi-Filesystem Information - -------------------------------------- - Information about the driver condition is given in - /proc/scsi/ibmmca/<host_no>. ibmmca_proc_info() provides this information. - - This table is quite informative for interested users. It shows the load - of commands on the subsystem and whether you are running the bypassed - (software) or integrated (hardware) SCSI-command set (see below). The - amount of accesses is shown. Read, write, modeselect is shown separately - in order to help debugging problems with CD-ROMs or tapedrives. - - The following table shows the list of 15 logical device numbers, that are - used by the SCSI-subsystem. The load on each ldn is shown in the table, - again, read and write commands are split. The last column shows the amount - of reassignments, that have been applied to the ldns, if you have more than - 15 pun/lun combinations available on the SCSI-bus. - - The last two tables show the pun/lun map and the positions of the ldns - on this pun/lun map. This may change during operation, when a ldn is - reassigned to another pun/lun combination. If the necessity for dynamical - assignments is set to 'no', the ldn structure keeps static. - - 2.12 /proc/mca-Filesystem Information - ------------------------------------- - The slot-file contains all default entries and in addition chip and I/O- - address information of the SCSI-subsystem. This information is provided - by ibmmca_getinfo(). - - 2.13 Supported IBM SCSI-Subsystems - ---------------------------------- - The following IBM SCSI-subsystems are supported by this driver: - - - IBM Fast/Wide SCSI-2 Adapter - - IBM 7568 Industrial Computer SCSI Adapter w/Cache - - IBM Expansion Unit SCSI Controller - - IBM SCSI Adapter w/Cache - - IBM SCSI Adapter - - IBM Integrated SCSI Controller - - All clones, 100% compatible with the chipset and subsystem command - system of IBM SCSI-adapters (forced detection) - - 2.14 Linux Kernel Versions - -------------------------- - The IBM SCSI-subsystem low level driver is prepared to be used with - all versions of Linux between 2.0.x and 2.4.x. The compatibility checks - are fully implemented up from version 3.1e of the driver. This means, that - you just need the latest ibmmca.h and ibmmca.c file and copy it in the - linux/drivers/scsi directory. The code is automatically adapted during - kernel compilation. This is different from kernel 2.4.0! Here version - 4.0 or later of the driver must be used for kernel 2.4.0 or later. Version - 4.0 or later does not work together with older kernels! Driver versions - older than 4.0 do not work together with kernel 2.4.0 or later. They work - on all older kernels. - - 3 Code History - -------------- - Jan 15 1996: First public release. - - Martin Kolinek - - Jan 23 1996: Scrapped code which reassigned scsi devices to logical - device numbers. Instead, the existing assignment (created - when the machine is powered-up or rebooted) is used. - A side effect is that the upper layer of Linux SCSI - device driver gets bogus scsi ids (this is benign), - and also the hard disks are ordered under Linux the - same way as they are under dos (i.e., C: disk is sda, - D: disk is sdb, etc.). - - Martin Kolinek - - I think that the CD-ROM is now detected only if a CD is - inside CD_ROM while Linux boots. This can be fixed later, - once the driver works on all types of PS/2's. - - Martin Kolinek - - Feb 7 1996: Modified biosparam function. Fixed the CD-ROM detection. - For now, devices other than harddisk and CD_ROM are - ignored. Temporarily modified abort() function - to behave like reset(). - - Martin Kolinek - - Mar 31 1996: The integrated scsi subsystem is correctly found - in PS/2 models 56,57, but not in model 76. Therefore - the ibmmca_scsi_setup() function has been added today. - This function allows the user to force detection of - scsi subsystem. The kernel option has format - ibmmcascsi=n - where n is the scsi_id (pun) of the subsystem. Most likely, n is 7. - - Martin Kolinek - - Aug 21 1996: Modified the code which maps ldns to (pun,0). It was - insufficient for those of us with CD-ROM changers. - - Chris Beauregard - - Dec 14 1996: More improvements to the ldn mapping. See check_devices - for details. Did more fiddling with the integrated SCSI detection, - but I think it's ultimately hopeless without actually testing the - model of the machine. The 56, 57, 76 and 95 (ultimedia) all have - different integrated SCSI register configurations. However, the 56 - and 57 are the only ones that have problems with forced detection. - - Chris Beauregard - - Mar 8-16 1997: Modified driver to run as a module and to support - multiple adapters. A structure, called ibmmca_hostdata, is now - present, containing all the variables, that were once only - available for one single adapter. The find_subsystem-routine has vanished. - The hardware recognition is now done in ibmmca_detect directly. - This routine checks for presence of MCA-bus, checks the interrupt - level and continues with checking the installed hardware. - Certain PS/2-models do not recognize a SCSI-subsystem automatically. - Hence, the setup defined by command-line-parameters is checked first. - Thereafter, the routine probes for an integrated SCSI-subsystem. - Finally, adapters are checked. This method has the advantage to cover all - possible combinations of multiple SCSI-subsystems on one MCA-board. Up to - eight SCSI-subsystems can be recognized and announced to the upper-level - drivers with this improvement. A set of defines made changes to other - routines as small as possible. - - Klaus Kudielka - - May 30 1997: (v1.5b) - 1) SCSI-command capability enlarged by the recognition of MODE_SELECT. - This needs the RD-Bit to be disabled on IM_OTHER_SCSI_CMD_CMD which - allows data to be written from the system to the device. It is a - necessary step to be allowed to set blocksize of SCSI-tape-drives and - the tape-speed, whithout confusing the SCSI-Subsystem. - 2) The recognition of a tape is included in the check_devices routine. - This is done by checking for TYPE_TAPE, that is already defined in - the kernel-scsi-environment. The markup of a tape is done in the - global ldn_is_tape[] array. If the entry on index ldn - is 1, there is a tapedrive connected. - 3) The ldn_is_tape[] array is necessary to distinguish between tape- and - other devices. Fixed blocklength devices should not cause a problem - with the SCB-command for read and write in the ibmmca_queuecommand - subroutine. Therefore, I only derivate the READ_XX, WRITE_XX for - the tape-devices, as recommended by IBM in this Technical Reference, - mentioned below. (IBM recommends to avoid using the read/write of the - subsystem, but the fact was, that read/write causes a command error from - the subsystem and this causes kernel-panic.) - 4) In addition, I propose to use the ldn instead of a fix char for the - display of PS2_DISK_LED_ON(). On 95, one can distinguish between the - devices that are accessed. It shows activity and easyfies debugging. - The tape-support has been tested with a SONY SDT-5200 and a HP DDS-2 - (I do not know yet the type). Optimization and CD-ROM audio-support, - I am working on ... - - Michael Lang - - June 19 1997: (v1.6b) - 1) Submitting the extra-array ldn_is_tape[] -> to the local ld[] - device-array. - 2) CD-ROM Audio-Play seems to work now. - 3) When using DDS-2 (120M) DAT-Tapes, mtst shows still density-code - 0x13 for ordinary DDS (61000 BPM) instead 0x24 for DDS-2. This appears - also on Adaptec 2940 adaptor in a PCI-System. Therefore, I assume that - the problem is independent of the low-level-driver/bus-architecture. - 4) Hexadecimal ldn on PS/2-95 LED-display. - 5) Fixing of the PS/2-LED on/off that it works right with tapedrives and - does not confuse the disk_rw_in_progress counter. - - Michael Lang - - June 21 1997: (v1.7b) - 1) Adding of a proc_info routine to inform in /proc/scsi/ibmmca/<host> the - outer-world about operational load statistics on the different ldns, - seen by the driver. Everybody that has more than one IBM-SCSI should - test this, because I only have one and cannot see what happens with more - than one IBM-SCSI hosts. - 2) Definition of a driver version-number to have a better recognition of - the source when there are existing too much releases that may confuse - the user, when reading about release-specific problems. Up to know, - I calculated the version-number to be 1.7. Because we are in BETA-test - yet, it is today 1.7b. - 3) Sorry for the heavy bug I programmed on June 19 1997! After that, the - CD-ROM did not work any more! The C7-command was a fake impression - I got while programming. Now, the READ and WRITE commands for CD-ROM are - no longer running over the subsystem, but just over - IM_OTHER_SCSI_CMD_CMD. On my observations (PS/2-95), now CD-ROM mounts - much faster(!) and hopefully all fancy multimedia-functions, like direct - digital recording from audio-CDs also work. (I tried it with cdda2wav - from the cdwtools-package and it filled up the harddisk immediately :-).) - To easify boolean logics, a further local device-type in ld[], called - is_cdrom has been included. - 4) If one uses a SCSI-device of unsupported type/commands, one - immediately runs into a kernel-panic caused by Command Error. To better - understand which SCSI-command caused the problem, I extended this - specific panic-message slightly. - - Michael Lang - - June 25 1997: (v1.8b) - 1) Some cosmetical changes for the handling of SCSI-device-types. - Now, also CD-Burners / WORMs and SCSI-scanners should work. For - MO-drives I have no experience, therefore not yet supported. - In logical_devices I changed from different type-variables to one - called 'device_type' where the values, corresponding to scsi.h, - of a SCSI-device are stored. - 2) There existed a small bug, that maps a device, coming after a SCSI-tape - wrong. Therefore, e.g. a CD-ROM changer would have been mapped wrong - -> problem removed. - 3) Extension of the logical_device structure. Now it contains also device, - vendor and revision-level of a SCSI-device for internal usage. - - Michael Lang - - June 26-29 1997: (v2.0b) - 1) The release number 2.0b is necessary because of the completely new done - recognition and handling of SCSI-devices with the adapter. As I got - from Chris the hint, that the subsystem can reassign ldns dynamically, - I remembered this immediate_assign-command, I found once in the handbook. - Now, the driver first kills all ldn assignments that are set by default - on the SCSI-subsystem. After that, it probes on all puns and luns for - devices by going through all combinations with immediate_assign and - probing for devices, using device_inquiry. The found physical(!) pun,lun - structure is stored in get_scsi[][] as device types. This is followed - by the assignment of all ldns to existing SCSI-devices. If more ldns - than devices are available, they are assigned to non existing pun,lun - combinations to satisfy the adapter. With this, the dynamical mapping - was possible to implement. (For further info see the text in the - source-code and in the description below. Read the description - below BEFORE installing this driver on your system!) - 2) Changed the name IBMMCA_DRIVER_VERSION to IBMMCA_SCSI_DRIVER_VERSION. - 3) The LED-display shows on PS/2-95 no longer the ldn, but the SCSI-ID - (pun) of the accessed SCSI-device. This is now senseful, because the - pun known within the driver is exactly the pun of the physical device - and no longer a fake one. - 4) The /proc/scsi/ibmmca/<host_no> consists now of the first part, where - hit-statistics of ldns is shown and a second part, where the maps of - physical and logical SCSI-devices are displayed. This could be very - interesting, when one is using more than 15 SCSI-devices in order to - follow the dynamical remapping of ldns. - - Michael Lang - - June 26-29 1997: (v2.0b-1) - 1) I forgot to switch the local_checking_phase_flag to 1 and back to 0 - in the dynamical remapping part in ibmmca_queuecommand for the - device_exist routine. Sorry. - - Michael Lang - - July 1-13 1997: (v3.0b,c) - 1) Merging of the driver-developments of Klaus Kudielka and Michael Lang - in order to get a optimum and unified driver-release for the - IBM-SCSI-Subsystem-Adapter(s). - For people, using the Kernel-release >=2.1.0, module-support should - be no problem. For users, running under <2.1.0, module-support may not - work, because the methods have changed between 2.0.x and 2.1.x. - 2) Added some more effective statistics for /proc-output. - 3) Change typecasting at necessary points from (unsigned long) to - virt_to_bus(). - 4) Included #if... at special points to have specific adaption of the - driver to kernel 2.0.x and 2.1.x. It should therefore also run with - later releases. - 5) Magneto-Optical drives and medium-changers are also recognized, now. - Therefore, we have a completely gapfree recognition of all SCSI- - device-types, that are known by Linux up to kernel 2.1.31. - 6) The flag SCSI_IBMMCA_DEV_RESET has been inserted. If it is set within - the configuration, each connected SCSI-device will get a reset command - during boottime. This can be necessary for some special SCSI-devices. - This flag should be included in Config.in. - (See also the new Config.in file.) - Probable next improvement: bad disk handler. - - Michael Lang - - Sept 14 1997: (v3.0c) - 1) Some debugging and speed optimization applied. - - Michael Lang - - Dec 15, 1997 - - chrisb@truespectra.com - - made the front panel display thingy optional, specified from the - command-line via ibmmcascsi=display. Along the lines of the /LED - option for the OS/2 driver. - - fixed small bug in the LED display that would hang some machines. - - reversed ordering of the drives (using the - IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD define). This is necessary for two main - reasons: - - users who've already installed Linux won't be screwed. Keep - in mind that not everyone is a kernel hacker. - - be consistent with the BIOS ordering of the drives. In the - BIOS, id 6 is C:, id 0 might be D:. With this scheme, they'd be - backwards. This confuses the crap out of those heathens who've - got a impure Linux installation (which, <wince>, I'm one of). - This whole problem arises because IBM is actually non-standard with - the id to BIOS mappings. You'll find, in fdomain.c, a similar - comment about a few FD BIOS revisions. The Linux (and apparently - industry) standard is that C: maps to scsi id (0,0). Let's stick - with that standard. - - Since this is technically a branch of my own, I changed the - version number to 3.0e-cpb. - - Jan 17, 1998: (v3.0f) - 1) Addition of some statistical info for /proc in proc_info. - 2) Taking care of the SCSI-assignment problem, dealed by Chris at Dec 15 - 1997. In fact, IBM is right, concerning the assignment of SCSI-devices - to driveletters. It is conform to the ANSI-definition of the SCSI- - standard to assign drive C: to SCSI-id 6, because it is the highest - hardware priority after the hostadapter (that has still today by - default everywhere id 7). Also realtime-operating systems that I use, - like LynxOS and OS9, which are quite industrial systems use top-down - numbering of the harddisks, that is also starting at id 6. Now, one - sits a bit between two chairs. On one hand side, using the define - IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD makes Linux assigning disks conform to - the IBM- and ANSI-SCSI-standard and keeps this driver downward - compatible to older releases, on the other hand side, people is quite - habituated in believing that C: is assigned to (0,0) and much other - SCSI-BIOS do so. Therefore, I moved the IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD - define out of the driver and put it into Config.in as subitem of - 'IBM SCSI support'. A help, added to Documentation/Configure.help - explains the differences between saying 'y' or 'n' to the user, when - IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD prompts, so the ordinary user is enabled to - choose the way of assignment, depending on his own situation and gusto. - 3) Adapted SCSI_IBMMCA_DEV_RESET to the local naming convention, so it is - now called IBMMCA_SCSI_DEV_RESET. - 4) Optimization of proc_info and its subroutines. - 5) Added more in-source-comments and extended the driver description by - some explanation about the SCSI-device-assignment problem. - - Michael Lang - - Jan 18, 1998: (v3.0g) - 1) Correcting names to be absolutely conform to the later 2.1.x releases. - This is necessary for - IBMMCA_SCSI_DEV_RESET -> CONFIG_IBMMCA_SCSI_DEV_RESET - IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD -> CONFIG_IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD - - Michael Lang - - Jan 18, 1999: (v3.1 MCA-team internal) - 1) The multiple hosts structure is accessed from every subroutine, so there - is no longer the address of the device structure passed from function - to function, but only the hostindex. A call by value, nothing more. This - should really be understood by the compiler and the subsystem should get - the right values and addresses. - 2) The SCSI-subsystem detection was not complete and quite hugely buggy up - to now, compared to the technical manual. The interpretation of the pos2 - register is not as assumed by people before, therefore, I dropped a note - in the ibmmca_detect function to show the registers' interpretation. - The pos-registers of integrated SCSI-subsystems do not contain any - information concerning the IO-port offset, really. Instead, they contain - some info about the adapter, the chip, the NVRAM .... The I/O-port is - fixed to 0x3540 - 0x3547. There can be more than one adapters in the - slots and they get an offset for the I/O area in order to get their own - I/O-address area. See chapter 2 for detailed description. At least, the - detection should now work right, even on models other than 95. The 95ers - came happily around the bug, as their pos2 register contains always 0 - in the critical area. Reserved bits are not allowed to be interpreted, - therefore, IBM is allowed to set those bits as they like and they may - really vary between different PS/2 models. So, now, no interpretation - of reserved bits - hopefully no trouble here anymore. - 3) The command error, which you may get on models 55, 56, 57, 70, 77 and - P70 may have been caused by the fact, that adapters of older design do - not like sending commands to non-existing SCSI-devices and will react - with a command error as a sign of protest. While this error is not - present on IBM SCSI Adapter w/cache, it appears on IBM Integrated SCSI - Adapters. Therefore, I implemented a workarround to forgive those - adapters their protests, but it is marked up in the statisctis, so - after a successful boot, you can see in /proc/scsi/ibmmca/<host_number> - how often the command errors have been forgiven to the SCSI-subsystem. - If the number is bigger than 0, you have a SCSI subsystem of older - design, what should no longer matter. - 4) ibmmca_getinfo() has been adapted very carefully, so it shows in the - slotn file really, what is senseful to be presented. - 5) ibmmca_register() has been extended in its parameter list in order to - pass the right name of the SCSI-adapter to Linux. - - Michael Lang - - Feb 6, 1999: (v3.1) - 1) Finally, after some 3.1Beta-releases, the 3.1 release. Sorry, for - the delayed release, but it was not finished with the release of - Kernel 2.2.0. - - Michael Lang - - Feb 10, 1999 (v3.1) - 1) Added a new commandline parameter called 'bypass' in order to bypass - every integrated subsystem SCSI-command consequently in case of - troubles. - 2) Concatenated read_capacity requests to the harddisks. It gave a lot - of troubles with some controllers and after I wanted to apply some - extensions, it jumped out in the same situation, on my w/cache, as like - on D. Weinehalls' Model 56, having integrated SCSI. This gave me the - descissive hint to move the code-part out and declare it global. Now, - it seems to work by far much better an more stable. Let us see, what - the world thinks of it... - 3) By the way, only Sony DAT-drives seem to show density code 0x13. A - test with a HP drive gave right results, so the problem is vendor- - specific and not a problem of the OS or the driver. - - Michael Lang - - Feb 18, 1999 (v3.1d) - 1) The abort command and the reset function have been checked for - inconsistencies. From the logical point of thinking, they work - at their optimum, now, but as the subsystem does not answer with an - interrupt, abort never finishes, sigh... - 2) Everything, that is accessed by a busmaster request from the adapter - is now declared as global variable, even the return-buffer in the - local checking phase. This assures, that no accesses to undefined memory - areas are performed. - 3) In ibmmca.h, the line unchecked_isa_dma is added with 1 in order to - avoid memory-pointers for the areas higher than 16MByte in order to - be sure, it also works on 16-Bit Microchannel bus systems. - 4) A lot of small things have been found, but nothing that endangered the - driver operations. Just it should be more stable, now. - - Michael Lang - - Feb 20, 1999 (v3.1e) - 1) I took the warning from the Linux Kernel Hackers Guide serious and - checked the cmd->result return value to the done-function very carefully. - It is obvious, that the IBM SCSI only delivers the tsb.dev_status, if - some error appeared, else it is undefined. Now, this is fixed. Before - any SCB command gets queued, the tsb.dev_status is set to 0, so the - cmd->result won't screw up Linux higher level drivers. - 2) The reset-function has slightly improved. This is still planed for - abort. During the abort and the reset function, no interrupts are - allowed. This is however quite hard to cope with, so the INT-status - register is read. When the interrupt gets queued, one can find its - status immediately on that register and is enabled to continue in the - reset function. I had no chance to test this really, only in a bogus - situation, I got this function running, but the situation was too much - worse for Linux :-(, so tests will continue. - 3) Buffers got now consistent. No open address mapping, as before and - therefore no further troubles with the unassigned memory segmentation - faults that scrambled probes on 95XX series and even on 85XX series, - when the kernel is done in a not so perfectly fitting way. - 4) Spontaneous interrupts from the subsystem, appearing without any - command previously queued are answered with a DID_BAD_INTR result. - 5) Taken into account ZP Gus' proposals to reverse the SCSI-device - scan order. As it does not work on Kernel 2.1.x or 2.2.x, as proposed - by him, I implemented it in a slightly derived way, which offers in - addition more flexibility. - - Michael Lang - - Apr 23, 2000 (v3.2pre1) - 1) During a very long time, I collected a huge amount of bugreports from - various people, trying really quite different things on their SCSI- - PS/2s. Today, all these bugreports are taken into account and should be - mostly solved. The major topics were: - - Driver crashes during boottime by no obvious reason. - - Driver panics while the midlevel-SCSI-driver is trying to inquire - the SCSI-device properties, even though hardware is in perfect state. - - Displayed info for the various slot-cards is interpreted wrong. - The main reasons for the crashes were two: - 1) The commands to check for device information like INQUIRY, - TEST_UNIT_READY, REQUEST_SENSE and MODE_SENSE cause the devices - to deliver information of up to 255 bytes. Midlevel drivers offer - 1024 bytes of space for the answer, but the IBM-SCSI-adapters do - not accept this, as they stick quite near to ANSI-SCSI and report - a COMMAND_ERROR message which causes the driver to panic. The main - problem was located around the INQUIRY command. Now, for all the - mentioned commands, the buffersize, sent to the adapter is at - maximum 255 which seems to be a quite reasonable solution. - TEST_UNIT_READY gets a buffersize of 0 to make sure, that no - data is transferred in order to avoid any possible command failure. - 2) On unsuccessful TEST_UNIT_READY, the midlevel-driver has to send - a REQUEST_SENSE in order to see, where the problem is located. This - REQUEST_SENSE may have various length in its answer-buffer. IBM - SCSI-subsystems report a command failure, if the returned buffersize - is different from the sent buffersize, but this can be supressed by - a special bit, which is now done and problems seem to be solved. - 2) Code adaption to all kernel-releases. Now, the 3.2 code compiles on - 2.0.x, 2.1.x, 2.2.x and 2.3.x kernel releases without any code-changes. - 3) Commandline-parameters are recognized again, even under Kernel 2.3.x or - higher. - - Michael Lang - - April 27, 2000 (v3.2pre2) - 1) Bypassed commands get read by the adapter by one cycle instead of two. - This increases SCSI-performance. - 2) Synchronous datatransfer is provided for sure to be 5 MHz on older - SCSI and 10 MHz on internal F/W SCSI-adapter. - 3) New commandline parameters allow to force the adapter to slow down while - in synchronous transfer. Could be helpful for very old devices. - - Michael Lang - - June 2, 2000 (v3.2pre5) - 1) Added Jim Shorney's contribution to make the activity indicator - flashing in addition to the LED-alphanumeric display-panel on - models 95A. To be enabled to choose this feature freely, a new - commandline parameter is added, called 'activity'. - 2) Added the READ_CONTROL bit for test_unit_ready SCSI-command. - 3) Added some suppress_exception bits to read_device_capacity and - all device_inquiry occurrences in the driver code. - 4) Complaints about the various KERNEL_VERSION implementations are - taken into account. Every local_LinuxKernelVersion occurrence is - now replaced by KERNEL_VERSION, defined in linux/version.h. - Corresponding changes were applied to ibmmca.h, too. This was a - contribution to all kernel-parts by Philipp Hahn. - - Michael Lang - - July 17, 2000 (v3.2pre8) - A long period of collecting bugreports from all corners of the world - now lead to the following corrections to the code: - 1) SCSI-2 F/W support crashed with a COMMAND ERROR. The reason for this - was, that it is possible to disbale Fast-SCSI for the external bus. - The feature-control command, where this crash appeared regularly tried - to set the maximum speed of 10MHz synchronous transfer speed and that - reports a COMMAND ERROR, if external bus Fast-SCSI is disabled. Now, - the feature-command probes down from maximum speed until the adapter - stops to complain, which is at the same time the maximum possible - speed selected in the reference program. So, F/W external can run at - 5 MHz (slow-) or 10 MHz (fast-SCSI). During feature probing, the - COMMAND ERROR message is used to detect if the adapter does not complain. - 2) Up to now, only combined busmode is supported, if you use external - SCSI-devices, attached to the F/W-controller. If dual bus is selected, - only the internal SCSI-devices get accessed by Linux. For most - applications, this should do fine. - 3) Wide-SCSI-addressing (16-Bit) is now possible for the internal F/W - bus on the F/W adapter. If F/W adapter is detected, the driver - automatically uses the extended PUN/LUN <-> LDN mapping tables, which - are now new from 3.2pre8. This allows PUNs between 0 and 15 and should - provide more fun with the F/W adapter. - 4) Several machines use the SCSI: POS registers for internal/undocumented - storage of system relevant info. This confused the driver, mainly on - models 9595, as it expected no onboard SCSI only, if all POS in - the integrated SCSI-area are set to 0x00 or 0xff. Now, the mechanism - to check for integrated SCSI is much more restrictive and these problems - should be history. - - Michael Lang - - July 18, 2000 (v3.2pre9) - This develop rather quickly at the moment. Two major things were still - missing in 3.2pre8: - 1) The adapter PUN for F/W adapters has 4-bits, while all other adapters - have 3-bits. This is now taken into account for F/W. - 2) When you select CONFIG_IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD, you should - normally get the inverse probing order of your devices on the SCSI-bus. - The ANSI device order gets scrambled in version 3.2pre8!! Now, a new - and tested algorithm inverts the device-order on the SCSI-bus and - automatically avoids accidental access to whatever SCSI PUN the adapter - is set and works with SCSI- and Wide-SCSI-addressing. - - Michael Lang - - July 23, 2000 (v3.2pre10 unpublished) - 1) LED panel display supports wide-addressing in ibmmca=display mode. - 2) Adapter-information and autoadaption to address-space is done. - 3) Auto-probing for maximum synchronous SCSI transfer rate is working. - 4) Optimization to some embedded function calls is applied. - 5) Added some comment for the user to wait for SCSI-devices being probed. - 6) Finished version 3.2 for Kernel 2.4.0. It least, I thought it is but... - - Michael Lang - - July 26, 2000 (v3.2pre11) - 1) I passed a horrible weekend getting mad with NMIs on kernel 2.2.14 and - a model 9595. Asking around in the community, nobody except of me has - seen such errors. Weired, but I am trying to recompile everything on - the model 9595. Maybe, as I use a specially modified gcc, that could - cause problems. But, it was not the reason. The true background was, - that the kernel was compiled for i386 and the 9595 has a 486DX-2. - Normally, no troubles should appear, but for this special machine, - only the right processor support is working fine! - 2) Previous problems with synchronous speed, slowing down from one adapter - to the next during probing are corrected. Now, local variables store - the synchronous bitmask for every single adapter found on the MCA bus. - 3) LED alphanumeric panel support for XX95 systems is now showing some - alive rotator during boottime. This makes sense, when no monitor is - connected to the system. You can get rid of all display activity, if - you do not use any parameter or just ibmmcascsi=activity, for the - harddrive activity LED, existant on all PS/2, except models 8595-XXX. - If no monitor is available, please use ibmmcascsi=display, which works - fine together with the linuxinfo utility for the LED-panel. - - Michael Lang - - July 29, 2000 (v3.2) - 1) Submission of this driver for kernel 2.4test-XX and 2.2.17. - - Michael Lang - - December 28, 2000 (v3.2d / v4.0) - 1) The interrupt handler had some wrong statement to wait for. This - was done due to experimental reasons during 3.2 development but it - has shown that this is not stable enough. Going back to wait for the - adapter to be not busy is best. - 2) Inquiry requests can be shorter than 255 bytes of return buffer. Due - to a bug in the ibmmca_queuecommand routine, this buffer was forced - to 255 at minimum. If the memory address, this return buffer is pointing - to does not offer more space, invalid memory accesses destabilized the - kernel. - 3) version 4.0 is only valid for kernel 2.4.0 or later. This is necessary - to remove old kernel version dependent waste from the driver. 3.2d is - only distributed with older kernels but keeps compatibility with older - kernel versions. 4.0 and higher versions cannot be used with older - kernels anymore!! You must have at least kernel 2.4.0!! - 4) The commandline argument 'bypass' and all its functionality got removed - in version 4.0. This was never really necessary, as all troubles were - based on non-command related reasons up to now, so bypassing commands - did not help to avoid any bugs. It is kept in 3.2X for debugging reasons. - 5) Dynamical reassignment of ldns was again verified and analyzed to be - completely inoperational. This is corrected and should work now. - 6) All commands that get sent to the SCSI adapter were verified and - completed in such a way, that they are now completely conform to the - demands in the technical description of IBM. Main candidates were the - DEVICE_INQUIRY, REQUEST_SENSE and DEVICE_CAPACITY commands. They must - be tranferred by bypassing the internal command buffer of the adapter - or else the response can be a random result. GET_POS_INFO would be more - safe in usage, if one could use the SUPRESS_EXCEPTION_SHORT, but this - is not allowed by the technical references of IBM. (Sorry, folks, the - model 80 problem is still a task to be solved in a different way.) - 7) v3.2d is still hold back for some days for testing, while 4.0 is - released. - - Michael Lang - - January 3, 2001 (v4.0a) - 1) A lot of complains after the 2.4.0-prerelease kernel came in about - the impossibility to compile the driver as a module. This problem is - solved. In combination with that problem, some unprecise declaration - of the function option_setup() gave some warnings during compilation. - This is solved, too by a forward declaration in ibmmca.c. - 2) #ifdef argument concerning CONFIG_SCSI_IBMMCA is no longer needed and - was entirely removed. - 3) Some switch statements got optimized in code, as some minor variables - in internal SCSI-command handlers. - - Michael Lang - - 4 To do - ------- - - IBM SCSI-2 F/W external SCSI bus support in separate mode! - - It seems that the handling of bad disks is really bad - - non-existent, in fact. However, a low-level driver cannot help - much, if such things happen. - - 5 Users' Manual - --------------- - 5.1 Commandline Parameters - -------------------------- - There exist several features for the IBM SCSI-subsystem driver. - The commandline parameter format is: - - ibmmcascsi=<command1>,<command2>,<command3>,... - - where commandN can be one of the following: - - display Owners of a model 95 or other PS/2 systems with an - alphanumeric LED display may set this to have their - display showing the following output of the 8 digits: - - ------DA - - where '-' stays dark, 'D' shows the SCSI-device id - and 'A' shows the SCSI hostindex, being currently - accessed. During boottime, this will give the message - - SCSIini* - - on the LED-panel, where the * represents a rotator, - showing the activity during the probing phase of the - driver which can take up to two minutes per SCSI-adapter. - adisplay This works like display, but gives more optical overview - of the activities on the SCSI-bus. The display will have - the following output: - - 6543210A - - where the numbers 0 to 6 light up at the shown position, - when the SCSI-device is accessed. 'A' shows again the SCSI - hostindex. If display nor adisplay is set, the internal - PS/2 harddisk LED is used for media-activities. So, if - you really do not have a system with a LED-display, you - should not set display or adisplay. Keep in mind, that - display and adisplay can only be used alternatively. It - is not recommended to use this option, if you have some - wide-addressed devices e.g. at the SCSI-2 F/W adapter in - your system. In addition, the usage of the display for - other tasks in parallel, like the linuxinfo-utility makes - no sense with this option. - activity This enables the PS/2 harddisk LED activity indicator. - Most PS/2 have no alphanumeric LED display, but some - indicator. So you should use this parameter to activate it. - If you own model 9595 (Server95), you can have both, the - LED panel and the activity indicator in parallel. However, - some PS/2s, like the 8595 do not have any harddisk LED - activity indicator, which means, that you must use the - alphanumeric LED display if you want to monitor SCSI- - activity. - bypass This is obsolete from driver version 4.0, as the adapters - got that far understood, that the selection between - integrated and bypassed commands should now work completely - correct! For historical reasons, the old description is - kept here: - This commandline parameter forces the driver never to use - SCSI-subsystems' integrated SCSI-command set. Except of - the immediate assign, which is of vital importance for - every IBM SCSI-subsystem to set its ldns right. Instead, - the ordinary ANSI-SCSI-commands are used and passed by the - controller to the SCSI-devices, therefore 'bypass'. The - effort, done by the subsystem is quite bogus and at a - minimum and therefore it should work everywhere. This - could maybe solve troubles with old or integrated SCSI- - controllers and nasty harddisks. Keep in mind, that using - this flag will slow-down SCSI-accesses slightly, as the - software generated commands are always slower than the - hardware. Non-harddisk devices always get read/write- - commands in bypass mode. On the most recent releases of - the Linux IBM-SCSI-driver, the bypass command should be - no longer a necessary thing, if you are sure about your - SCSI-hardware! - normal This is the parameter, introduced on the 2.0.x development - rail by ZP Gu. This parameter defines the SCSI-device - scan order in the new industry standard. This means, that - the first SCSI-device is the one with the lowest pun. - E.g. harddisk at pun=0 is scanned before harddisk at - pun=6, which means, that harddisk at pun=0 gets sda - and the one at pun=6 gets sdb. - ansi The ANSI-standard for the right scan order, as done by - IBM, Microware and Microsoft, scans SCSI-devices starting - at the highest pun, which means, that e.g. harddisk at - pun=6 gets sda and a harddisk at pun=0 gets sdb. If you - like to have the same SCSI-device order, as in DOS, OS-9 - or OS/2, just use this parameter. - fast SCSI-I/O in synchronous mode is done at 5 MHz for IBM- - SCSI-devices. SCSI-2 Fast/Wide Adapter/A external bus - should then run at 10 MHz if Fast-SCSI is enabled, - and at 5 MHz if Fast-SCSI is disabled on the external - bus. This is the default setting when nothing is - specified here. - medium Synchronous rate is at 50% approximately, which means - 2.5 MHz for IBM SCSI-adapters and 5.0 MHz for F/W ext. - SCSI-bus (when Fast-SCSI speed enabled on external bus). - slow The slowest possible synchronous transfer rate is set. - This means 1.82 MHz for IBM SCSI-adapters and 2.0 MHz - for F/W external bus at Fast-SCSI speed on the external - bus. - - A further option is that you can force the SCSI-driver to accept a SCSI- - subsystem at a certain I/O-address with a predefined adapter PUN. This - is done by entering - - commandN = I/O-base - commandN+1 = adapter PUN - - e.g. ibmmcascsi=0x3540,7 will force the driver to detect a SCSI-subsystem - at I/O-address 0x3540 with adapter PUN 7. Please only use this method, if - the driver does really not recognize your SCSI-adapter! With driver version - 3.2, this recognition of various adapters was hugely improved and you - should try first to remove your commandline arguments of such type with a - newer driver. I bet, it will be recognized correctly. Even multiple and - different types of IBM SCSI-adapters should be recognized correctly, too. - Use the forced detection method only as last solution! - - Examples: - - ibmmcascsi=adisplay - - This will use the advanced display mode for the model 95 LED alphanumeric - display. - - ibmmcascsi=display,0x3558,7 - - This will activate the default display mode for the model 95 LED display - and will force the driver to accept a SCSI-subsystem at I/O-base 0x3558 - with adapter PUN 7. - - 5.2 Troubleshooting - ------------------- - The following FAQs should help you to solve some major problems with this - driver. - - Q: "Reset SCSI-devices at boottime" halts the system at boottime, why? - A: This is only tested with the IBM SCSI Adapter w/cache. It is not - yet prooved to run on other adapters, however you may be lucky. - In version 3.1d this has been hugely improved and should work better, - now. Normally you really won't need to activate this flag in the - kernel configuration, as all post 1989 SCSI-devices should accept - the reset-signal, when the computer is switched on. The SCSI- - subsystem generates this reset while being initialized. This flag - is really reserved for users with very old, very strange or self-made - SCSI-devices. - Q: Why is the SCSI-order of my drives mirrored to the device-order - seen from OS/2 or DOS ? - A: It depends on the operating system, if it looks at the devices in - ANSI-SCSI-standard (starting from pun 6 and going down to pun 0) or - if it just starts at pun 0 and counts up. If you want to be conform - with OS/2 and DOS, you have to activate this flag in the kernel - configuration or you should set 'ansi' as parameter for the kernel. - The parameter 'normal' sets the new industry standard, starting - from pun 0, scanning up to pun 6. This allows you to change your - opinion still after having already compiled the kernel. - Q: Why I cannot find the IBM MCA SCSI support in the config menue? - A: You have to activate MCA bus support, first. - Q: Where can I find the latest info about this driver? - A: See the file MAINTAINERS for the current WWW-address, which offers - updates, info and Q/A lists. At this file's origin, the webaddress - was: http://www.uni-mainz.de/~langm000/linux.html - Q: My SCSI-adapter is not recognized by the driver, what can I do? - A: Just force it to be recognized by kernel parameters. See section 5.1. - If this really happens, do also send e-mail to the maintainer, as - forced detection should be never necessary. Forced detection is in - principal some flaw of the driver adapter detection and goes into - bugreports. - Q: The driver screws up, if it starts to probe SCSI-devices, is there - some way out of it? - A: Yes, that was some recognition problem of the correct SCSI-adapter - and its I/O base addresses. Upgrade your driver to the latest release - and it should be fine again. - Q: I get a message: panic IBM MCA SCSI: command error .... , what can - I do against this? - A: Previously, I followed the way by ignoring command errors by using - ibmmcascsi=forgiveall, but this command no longer exists and is - obsolete. If such a problem appears, it is caused by some segmentation - fault of the driver, which maps to some unallowed area. The latest - version of the driver should be ok, as most bugs have been solved. - Q: There are still kernel panics, even after having set - ibmmcascsi=forgiveall. Are there other possibilities to prevent - such panics? - A: No, get just the latest release of the driver and it should work - better and better with increasing version number. Forget about this - ibmmcascsi=forgiveall, as also ignorecmd are obsolete.! - Q: Linux panics or stops without any comment, but it is probable, that my - harddisk(s) have bad blocks. - A: Sorry, the bad-block handling is still a feeble point of this driver, - but is on the schedule for development in the near future. - Q: Linux panics while dynamically assigning SCSI-ids or ldns. - A: If you disconnect a SCSI-device from the machine, while Linux is up - and the driver uses dynamical reassignment of logical device numbers - (ldn), it really gets "angry" if it won't find devices, that were still - present at boottime and stops Linux. - Q: The system does not recover after an abort-command has been generated. - A: This is regrettably true, as it is not yet understood, why the - SCSI-adapter does really NOT generate any interrupt at the end of - the abort-command. As no interrupt is generated, the abort command - cannot get finished and the system hangs, sorry, but checks are - running to hunt down this problem. If there is a real pending command, - the interrupt MUST get generated after abort. In this case, it - should finish well. - Q: The system gets in bad shape after a SCSI-reset, is this known? - A: Yes, as there are a lot of prescriptions (see the Linux Hackers' - Guide) what has to be done for reset, we still share the bad shape of - the reset functions with all other low level SCSI-drivers. - Astonishingly, reset works in most cases quite ok, but the harddisks - won't run in synchonous mode anymore after a reset, until you reboot. - Q: Why does my XXX w/Cache adapter not use read-prefetch? - A: Ok, that is not completely possible. If a cache is present, the - adapter tries to use it internally. Explicitly, one can use the cache - with a read prefetch command, maybe in future, but this requires - some major overhead of SCSI-commands that risks the performance to - go down more than it gets improved. Tests with that are running. - Q: I have a IBM SCSI-2 Fast/Wide adapter, it boots in some way and hangs. - A: Yes, that is understood, as for sure, your SCSI-2 Fast/Wide adapter - was in such a case recognized as integrated SCSI-adapter or something - else, but not as the correct adapter. As the I/O-ports get assigned - wrongly by that reason, the system should crash in most cases. You - should upgrade to the latest release of the SCSI-driver. The - recommended version is 3.2 or later. Here, the F/W support is in - a stable and reliable condition. Wide-addressing is in addition - supported. - Q: I get a Ooops message and something like "killing interrupt". - A: The reason for this is that the IBM SCSI-subsystem only sends a - termination status back, if some error appeared. In former releases - of the driver, it was not checked, if the termination status block - is NULL. From version 3.2, it is taken care of this. - Q: I have a F/W adapter and the driver sees my internal SCSI-devices, - but ignores the external ones. - A: Select combined busmode in the IBM config-program and check for that - no SCSI-id on the external devices appears on internal devices. - Reboot afterwards. Dual busmode is supported, but works only for the - internal bus, yet. External bus is still ignored. Take care for your - SCSI-ids. If combined bus-mode is activated, on some adapters, - the wide-addressing is not possible, so devices with ids between 8 - and 15 get ignored by the driver & adapter! - Q: I have a 9595 and I get a NMI during heavy SCSI I/O e.g. during fsck. - A COMMAND ERROR is reported and characters on the screen are missing. - Warm reboot is not possible. Things look like quite weired. - A: Check the processor type of your 9595. If you have an 80486 or 486DX-2 - processor complex on your mainboard and you compiled a kernel that - supports 80386 processors, it is possible, that the kernel cannot - keep track of the PS/2 interrupt handling and stops on an NMI. Just - compile a kernel for the correct processor type of your PS/2 and - everything should be fine. This is necessary even if one assumes, - that some 80486 system should be downward compatible to 80386 - software. - Q: Some commands hang and interrupts block the machine. After some - timeout, the syslog reports that it tries to call abort, but the - machine is frozen. - A: This can be a busy wait bug in the interrupt handler of driver - version 3.2. You should at least upgrade to 3.2c if you use - kernel < 2.4.0 and driver version 4.0 if you use kernel 2.4.0 or - later (including all test releases). - Q: I have a PS/2 model 80 and more than 16 MBytes of RAM. The driver - completely refuses to work, reports NMIs, COMMAND ERRORs or other - ambiguous stuff. When reducing the RAM size down below 16 MB, - everything is running smoothly. - A: No real answer, yet. In any case, one should force the kernel to - present SCBs only below the 16 MBytes barrier. Maybe this solves the - problem. Not yet tried, but guessing that it could work. To get this, - set unchecked_isa_dma argument of ibmmca.h from 0 to 1. - - 5.3 Bugreports - -------------- - If you really find bugs in the sourcecode or the driver will successfully - refuse to work on your machine, you should send a bug report to me. The - best for this is to follow the instructions on the WWW-page for this - driver. Fill out the bug-report form, placed on the WWW-page and ship it, - so the bugs can be taken into account with maximum efforts. But, please - do not send bug reports about this driver to Linus Torvalds or Leonard - Zubkoff, as Linus is burried in E-Mail and Leonard is supervising all - SCSI-drivers and won't have the time left to look inside every single - driver to fix a bug and especially DO NOT send modified code to Linus - Torvalds or Alan J. Cox which has not been checked here!!! They are both - quite burried in E-mail (as me, sometimes, too) and one should first check - for problems on my local teststand. Recently, I got a lot of - bugreports for errors in the ibmmca.c code, which I could not imagine, but - a look inside some Linux-distribution showed me quite often some modified - code, which did no longer work on most other machines than the one of the - modifier. Ok, so now that there is maintenance service available for this - driver, please use this address first in order to keep the level of - confusion low. Thank you! - - When you get a SCSI-error message that panics your system, a list of - register-entries of the SCSI-subsystem is shown (from Version 3.1d). With - this list, it is very easy for the maintainer to localize the problem in - the driver or in the configuration of the user. Please write down all the - values from this report and send them to the maintainer. This would really - help a lot and makes life easier concerning misunderstandings. - - Use the bug-report form (see 5.4 for its address) to send all the bug- - stuff to the maintainer or write e-mail with the values from the table. - - 5.4 Support WWW-page - -------------------- - The address of the IBM SCSI-subsystem supporting WWW-page is: - - http://www.staff.uni-mainz.de/mlang/linux.html - - Here you can find info about the background of this driver, patches, - troubleshooting support, news and a bugreport form. Please check that - WWW-page regularly for latest hints. If ever this URL changes, please - refer to the MAINTAINERS file in order to get the latest address. - - For the bugreport, please fill out the formular on the corresponding - WWW-page. Read the dedicated instructions and write as much as you - know about your problem. If you do not like such formulars, please send - some e-mail directly, but at least with the same information as required by - the formular. - - If you have extensive bugreports, including Ooops messages and - screen-shots, please feel free to send it directly to the address - of the maintainer, too. The current address of the maintainer is: - - Michael Lang <langa2@kph.uni-mainz.de> - - 6 References - ------------ - IBM Corp., "Update for the PS/2 Hardware Interface Technical Reference, - Common Interfaces", Armonk, September 1991, PN 04G3281, - (available in the U.S. for $21.75 at 1-800-IBM-PCTB or in Germany for - around 40,-DM at "Hallo IBM"). - - IBM Corp., "Personal System/2 Micro Channel SCSI - Adapter with Cache Technical Reference", Armonk, March 1990, PN 68X2365. - - IBM Corp., "Personal System/2 Micro Channel SCSI - Adapter Technical Reference", Armonk, March 1990, PN 68X2397. - - IBM Corp., "SCSI-2 Fast/Wide Adapter/A Technical Reference - Dual Bus", - Armonk, March 1994, PN 83G7545. - - Friedhelm Schmidt, "SCSI-Bus und IDE-Schnittstelle - Moderne Peripherie- - Schnittstellen: Hardware, Protokollbeschreibung und Anwendung", 2. Aufl. - Addison Wesley, 1996. - - Michael K. Johnson, "The Linux Kernel Hackers' Guide", Version 0.6, Chapel - Hill - North Carolina, 1995 - - Andreas Kaiser, "SCSI TAPE BACKUP for OS/2 2.0", Version 2.12, Stuttgart - 1993 - - Helmut Rompel, "IBM Computerwelt GUIDE", What is what bei IBM., Systeme * - Programme * Begriffe, IWT-Verlag GmbH - Muenchen, 1988 - - 7 Credits to - ------------ - 7.1 People - ---------- - Klaus Grimm - who already a long time ago gave me the old code from the - SCSI-driver in order to get it running for some old machine - in our institute. - Martin Kolinek - who wrote the first release of the IBM SCSI-subsystem driver. - Chris Beauregard - who for a long time maintained MCA-Linux and the SCSI-driver - in the beginning. Chris, wherever you are: Cheers to you! - Klaus Kudielka - with whom in the 2.1.x times, I had a quite fruitful - cooperation to get the driver running as a module and to get - it running with multiple SCSI-adapters. - David Weinehall - for his excellent maintenance of the MCA-stuff and the quite - detailed bug reports and ideas for this driver (and his - patience ;-)). - Alan J. Cox - for his bugreports and his bold activities in cross-checking - the driver-code with his teststand. - - 7.2 Sponsors & Supporters - ------------------------- - "Hallo IBM", - IBM-Deutschland GmbH - the service of IBM-Deutschland for customers. Their E-Mail - service is unbeatable. Whatever old stuff I asked for, I - always got some helpful answers. - Karl-Otto Reimers, - IBM Klub - Sparte IBM Geschichte, Sindelfingen - for sending me a copy of the w/Cache manual from the - IBM-Deutschland archives. - Harald Staiger - for his extensive hardware donations which allows me today - still to test the driver in various constellations. - Erich Fritscher - for his very kind sponsoring. - Louis Ohland, - Charles Lasitter - for support by shipping me an IBM SCSI-2 Fast/Wide manual. - In addition, the contribution of various hardware is quite - decessive and will make it possible to add FWSR (RAID) - adapter support to the driver in the near future! So, - complaints about no RAID support won't remain forever. - Yes, folks, that is no joke, RAID support is going to rise! - Erik Weber - for the great deal we made about a model 9595 and the nice - surrounding equipment and the cool trip to Mannheim - second-hand computer market. In addition, I would like - to thank him for his exhaustive SCSI-driver testing on his - 95er PS/2 park. - Anthony Hogbin - for his direct shipment of a SCSI F/W adapter, which allowed - me immediately on the first stage to try it on model 8557 - together with onboard SCSI adapter and some SCSI w/Cache. - Andreas Hotz - for his support by memory and an IBM SCSI-adapter. Collecting - all this together now allows me to try really things with - the driver at maximum load and variety on various models in - a very quick and efficient way. - Peter Jennewein - for his model 30, which serves me as part of my teststand - and his cool remark about how you make an ordinary diskette - drive working and how to connect it to an IBM-diskette port. - Johannes Gutenberg-Universitaet, Mainz & - Institut fuer Kernphysik, Mainz Microtron (MAMI) - for the offered space, the link, placed on the central - homepage and the space to store and offer the driver and - related material and the free working times, which allow - me to answer all your e-mail. - - 8 Trademarks - ------------ - IBM, PS/2, OS/2, Microchannel are registered trademarks of International - Business Machines Corporation - - MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation - - Microware, OS-9 are registered trademarks of Microware Systems - - 9 Disclaimer - ------------ - Beside the GNU General Public License and the dependent disclaimers and disclaimers - concerning the Linux-kernel in special, this SCSI-driver comes without any - warranty. Its functionality is tested as good as possible on certain - machines and combinations of computer hardware, which does not exclude, - that dataloss or severe damage of hardware is possible while using this - part of software on some arbitrary computer hardware or in combination - with other software packages. It is highly recommended to make backup - copies of your data before using this software. Furthermore, personal - injuries by hardware defects, that could be caused by this SCSI-driver are - not excluded and it is highly recommended to handle this driver with a - maximum of carefulness. - - This driver supports hardware, produced by International Business Machines - Corporation (IBM). - ------- -Michael Lang -(langa2@kph.uni-mainz.de) diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/in2000.txt b/Documentation/scsi/in2000.txt index 80f10404264..c3e2a90475d 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/in2000.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/in2000.txt @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ UPDATE NEWS: version 1.32 - 28 Mar 98 UPDATE NEWS: version 1.31 - 6 Jul 97 Fixed a bug that caused incorrect SCSI status bytes to be - returned from commands sent to LUN's greater than 0. This + returned from commands sent to LUNs greater than 0. This means that CDROM changers work now! Fixed a bug in the handling of command-line arguments when loaded as a module. Also put all the header data in in2000.h where it belongs. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/libsas.txt b/Documentation/scsi/libsas.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3cc9c7843e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/libsas.txt @@ -0,0 +1,469 @@ +SAS Layer +--------- + +The SAS Layer is a management infrastructure which manages +SAS LLDDs. It sits between SCSI Core and SAS LLDDs. The +layout is as follows: while SCSI Core is concerned with +SAM/SPC issues, and a SAS LLDD+sequencer is concerned with +phy/OOB/link management, the SAS layer is concerned with: + + * SAS Phy/Port/HA event management (LLDD generates, + SAS Layer processes), + * SAS Port management (creation/destruction), + * SAS Domain discovery and revalidation, + * SAS Domain device management, + * SCSI Host registration/unregistration, + * Device registration with SCSI Core (SAS) or libata + (SATA), and + * Expander management and exporting expander control + to user space. + +A SAS LLDD is a PCI device driver. It is concerned with +phy/OOB management, and vendor specific tasks and generates +events to the SAS layer. + +The SAS Layer does most SAS tasks as outlined in the SAS 1.1 +spec. + +The sas_ha_struct describes the SAS LLDD to the SAS layer. +Most of it is used by the SAS Layer but a few fields need to +be initialized by the LLDDs. + +After initializing your hardware, from the probe() function +you call sas_register_ha(). It will register your LLDD with +the SCSI subsystem, creating a SCSI host and it will +register your SAS driver with the sysfs SAS tree it creates. +It will then return. Then you enable your phys to actually +start OOB (at which point your driver will start calling the +notify_* event callbacks). + +Structure descriptions: + +struct sas_phy -------------------- +Normally this is statically embedded to your driver's +phy structure: + struct my_phy { + blah; + struct sas_phy sas_phy; + bleh; + }; +And then all the phys are an array of my_phy in your HA +struct (shown below). + +Then as you go along and initialize your phys you also +initialize the sas_phy struct, along with your own +phy structure. + +In general, the phys are managed by the LLDD and the ports +are managed by the SAS layer. So the phys are initialized +and updated by the LLDD and the ports are initialized and +updated by the SAS layer. + +There is a scheme where the LLDD can RW certain fields, +and the SAS layer can only read such ones, and vice versa. +The idea is to avoid unnecessary locking. + +enabled -- must be set (0/1) +id -- must be set [0,MAX_PHYS) +class, proto, type, role, oob_mode, linkrate -- must be set +oob_mode -- you set this when OOB has finished and then notify +the SAS Layer. + +sas_addr -- this normally points to an array holding the sas +address of the phy, possibly somewhere in your my_phy +struct. + +attached_sas_addr -- set this when you (LLDD) receive an +IDENTIFY frame or a FIS frame, _before_ notifying the SAS +layer. The idea is that sometimes the LLDD may want to fake +or provide a different SAS address on that phy/port and this +allows it to do this. At best you should copy the sas +address from the IDENTIFY frame or maybe generate a SAS +address for SATA directly attached devices. The Discover +process may later change this. + +frame_rcvd -- this is where you copy the IDENTIFY/FIS frame +when you get it; you lock, copy, set frame_rcvd_size and +unlock the lock, and then call the event. It is a pointer +since there's no way to know your hw frame size _exactly_, +so you define the actual array in your phy struct and let +this pointer point to it. You copy the frame from your +DMAable memory to that area holding the lock. + +sas_prim -- this is where primitives go when they're +received. See sas.h. Grab the lock, set the primitive, +release the lock, notify. + +port -- this points to the sas_port if the phy belongs +to a port -- the LLDD only reads this. It points to the +sas_port this phy is part of. Set by the SAS Layer. + +ha -- may be set; the SAS layer sets it anyway. + +lldd_phy -- you should set this to point to your phy so you +can find your way around faster when the SAS layer calls one +of your callbacks and passes you a phy. If the sas_phy is +embedded you can also use container_of -- whatever you +prefer. + + +struct sas_port -------------------- +The LLDD doesn't set any fields of this struct -- it only +reads them. They should be self explanatory. + +phy_mask is 32 bit, this should be enough for now, as I +haven't heard of a HA having more than 8 phys. + +lldd_port -- I haven't found use for that -- maybe other +LLDD who wish to have internal port representation can make +use of this. + + +struct sas_ha_struct -------------------- +It normally is statically declared in your own LLDD +structure describing your adapter: +struct my_sas_ha { + blah; + struct sas_ha_struct sas_ha; + struct my_phy phys[MAX_PHYS]; + struct sas_port sas_ports[MAX_PHYS]; /* (1) */ + bleh; +}; + +(1) If your LLDD doesn't have its own port representation. + +What needs to be initialized (sample function given below). + +pcidev +sas_addr -- since the SAS layer doesn't want to mess with + memory allocation, etc, this points to statically + allocated array somewhere (say in your host adapter + structure) and holds the SAS address of the host + adapter as given by you or the manufacturer, etc. +sas_port +sas_phy -- an array of pointers to structures. (see + note above on sas_addr). + These must be set. See more notes below. +num_phys -- the number of phys present in the sas_phy array, + and the number of ports present in the sas_port + array. There can be a maximum num_phys ports (one per + port) so we drop the num_ports, and only use + num_phys. + +The event interface: + + /* LLDD calls these to notify the class of an event. */ + void (*notify_ha_event)(struct sas_ha_struct *, enum ha_event); + void (*notify_port_event)(struct sas_phy *, enum port_event); + void (*notify_phy_event)(struct sas_phy *, enum phy_event); + +When sas_register_ha() returns, those are set and can be +called by the LLDD to notify the SAS layer of such events +the SAS layer. + +The port notification: + + /* The class calls these to notify the LLDD of an event. */ + void (*lldd_port_formed)(struct sas_phy *); + void (*lldd_port_deformed)(struct sas_phy *); + +If the LLDD wants notification when a port has been formed +or deformed it sets those to a function satisfying the type. + +A SAS LLDD should also implement at least one of the Task +Management Functions (TMFs) described in SAM: + + /* Task Management Functions. Must be called from process context. */ + int (*lldd_abort_task)(struct sas_task *); + int (*lldd_abort_task_set)(struct domain_device *, u8 *lun); + int (*lldd_clear_aca)(struct domain_device *, u8 *lun); + int (*lldd_clear_task_set)(struct domain_device *, u8 *lun); + int (*lldd_I_T_nexus_reset)(struct domain_device *); + int (*lldd_lu_reset)(struct domain_device *, u8 *lun); + int (*lldd_query_task)(struct sas_task *); + +For more information please read SAM from T10.org. + +Port and Adapter management: + + /* Port and Adapter management */ + int (*lldd_clear_nexus_port)(struct sas_port *); + int (*lldd_clear_nexus_ha)(struct sas_ha_struct *); + +A SAS LLDD should implement at least one of those. + +Phy management: + + /* Phy management */ + int (*lldd_control_phy)(struct sas_phy *, enum phy_func); + +lldd_ha -- set this to point to your HA struct. You can also +use container_of if you embedded it as shown above. + +A sample initialization and registration function +can look like this (called last thing from probe()) +*but* before you enable the phys to do OOB: + +static int register_sas_ha(struct my_sas_ha *my_ha) +{ + int i; + static struct sas_phy *sas_phys[MAX_PHYS]; + static struct sas_port *sas_ports[MAX_PHYS]; + + my_ha->sas_ha.sas_addr = &my_ha->sas_addr[0]; + + for (i = 0; i < MAX_PHYS; i++) { + sas_phys[i] = &my_ha->phys[i].sas_phy; + sas_ports[i] = &my_ha->sas_ports[i]; + } + + my_ha->sas_ha.sas_phy = sas_phys; + my_ha->sas_ha.sas_port = sas_ports; + my_ha->sas_ha.num_phys = MAX_PHYS; + + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_port_formed = my_port_formed; + + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_dev_found = my_dev_found; + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_dev_gone = my_dev_gone; + + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_max_execute_num = lldd_max_execute_num; (1) + + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_queue_size = ha_can_queue; + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_execute_task = my_execute_task; + + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_abort_task = my_abort_task; + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_abort_task_set = my_abort_task_set; + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_clear_aca = my_clear_aca; + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_clear_task_set = my_clear_task_set; + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_I_T_nexus_reset= NULL; (2) + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_lu_reset = my_lu_reset; + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_query_task = my_query_task; + + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_clear_nexus_port = my_clear_nexus_port; + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_clear_nexus_ha = my_clear_nexus_ha; + + my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_control_phy = my_control_phy; + + return sas_register_ha(&my_ha->sas_ha); +} + +(1) This is normally a LLDD parameter, something of the +lines of a task collector. What it tells the SAS Layer is +whether the SAS layer should run in Direct Mode (default: +value 0 or 1) or Task Collector Mode (value greater than 1). + +In Direct Mode, the SAS Layer calls Execute Task as soon as +it has a command to send to the SDS, _and_ this is a single +command, i.e. not linked. + +Some hardware (e.g. aic94xx) has the capability to DMA more +than one task at a time (interrupt) from host memory. Task +Collector Mode is an optional feature for HAs which support +this in their hardware. (Again, it is completely optional +even if your hardware supports it.) + +In Task Collector Mode, the SAS Layer would do _natural_ +coalescing of tasks and at the appropriate moment it would +call your driver to DMA more than one task in a single HA +interrupt. DMBS may want to use this by insmod/modprobe +setting the lldd_max_execute_num to something greater than +1. + +(2) SAS 1.1 does not define I_T Nexus Reset TMF. + +Events +------ + +Events are _the only way_ a SAS LLDD notifies the SAS layer +of anything. There is no other method or way a LLDD to tell +the SAS layer of anything happening internally or in the SAS +domain. + +Phy events: + PHYE_LOSS_OF_SIGNAL, (C) + PHYE_OOB_DONE, + PHYE_OOB_ERROR, (C) + PHYE_SPINUP_HOLD. + +Port events, passed on a _phy_: + PORTE_BYTES_DMAED, (M) + PORTE_BROADCAST_RCVD, (E) + PORTE_LINK_RESET_ERR, (C) + PORTE_TIMER_EVENT, (C) + PORTE_HARD_RESET. + +Host Adapter event: + HAE_RESET + +A SAS LLDD should be able to generate + - at least one event from group C (choice), + - events marked M (mandatory) are mandatory (only one), + - events marked E (expander) if it wants the SAS layer + to handle domain revalidation (only one such). + - Unmarked events are optional. + +Meaning: + +HAE_RESET -- when your HA got internal error and was reset. + +PORTE_BYTES_DMAED -- on receiving an IDENTIFY/FIS frame +PORTE_BROADCAST_RCVD -- on receiving a primitive +PORTE_LINK_RESET_ERR -- timer expired, loss of signal, loss +of DWS, etc. (*) +PORTE_TIMER_EVENT -- DWS reset timeout timer expired (*) +PORTE_HARD_RESET -- Hard Reset primitive received. + +PHYE_LOSS_OF_SIGNAL -- the device is gone (*) +PHYE_OOB_DONE -- OOB went fine and oob_mode is valid +PHYE_OOB_ERROR -- Error while doing OOB, the device probably +got disconnected. (*) +PHYE_SPINUP_HOLD -- SATA is present, COMWAKE not sent. + +(*) should set/clear the appropriate fields in the phy, + or alternatively call the inlined sas_phy_disconnected() + which is just a helper, from their tasklet. + +The Execute Command SCSI RPC: + + int (*lldd_execute_task)(struct sas_task *, int num, + unsigned long gfp_flags); + +Used to queue a task to the SAS LLDD. @task is the tasks to +be executed. @num should be the number of tasks being +queued at this function call (they are linked listed via +task::list), @gfp_mask should be the gfp_mask defining the +context of the caller. + +This function should implement the Execute Command SCSI RPC, +or if you're sending a SCSI Task as linked commands, you +should also use this function. + +That is, when lldd_execute_task() is called, the command(s) +go out on the transport *immediately*. There is *no* +queuing of any sort and at any level in a SAS LLDD. + +The use of task::list is two-fold, one for linked commands, +the other discussed below. + +It is possible to queue up more than one task at a time, by +initializing the list element of struct sas_task, and +passing the number of tasks enlisted in this manner in num. + +Returns: -SAS_QUEUE_FULL, -ENOMEM, nothing was queued; + 0, the task(s) were queued. + +If you want to pass num > 1, then either +A) you're the only caller of this function and keep track + of what you've queued to the LLDD, or +B) you know what you're doing and have a strategy of + retrying. + +As opposed to queuing one task at a time (function call), +batch queuing of tasks, by having num > 1, greatly +simplifies LLDD code, sequencer code, and _hardware design_, +and has some performance advantages in certain situations +(DBMS). + +The LLDD advertises if it can take more than one command at +a time at lldd_execute_task(), by setting the +lldd_max_execute_num parameter (controlled by "collector" +module parameter in aic94xx SAS LLDD). + +You should leave this to the default 1, unless you know what +you're doing. + +This is a function of the LLDD, to which the SAS layer can +cater to. + +int lldd_queue_size + The host adapter's queue size. This is the maximum +number of commands the lldd can have pending to domain +devices on behalf of all upper layers submitting through +lldd_execute_task(). + +You really want to set this to something (much) larger than +1. + +This _really_ has absolutely nothing to do with queuing. +There is no queuing in SAS LLDDs. + +struct sas_task { + dev -- the device this task is destined to + list -- must be initialized (INIT_LIST_HEAD) + task_proto -- _one_ of enum sas_proto + scatter -- pointer to scatter gather list array + num_scatter -- number of elements in scatter + total_xfer_len -- total number of bytes expected to be transferred + data_dir -- PCI_DMA_... + task_done -- callback when the task has finished execution +}; + +DISCOVERY +--------- + +The sysfs tree has the following purposes: + a) It shows you the physical layout of the SAS domain at + the current time, i.e. how the domain looks in the + physical world right now. + b) Shows some device parameters _at_discovery_time_. + +This is a link to the tree(1) program, very useful in +viewing the SAS domain: +ftp://mama.indstate.edu/linux/tree/ +I expect user space applications to actually create a +graphical interface of this. + +That is, the sysfs domain tree doesn't show or keep state if +you e.g., change the meaning of the READY LED MEANING +setting, but it does show you the current connection status +of the domain device. + +Keeping internal device state changes is responsibility of +upper layers (Command set drivers) and user space. + +When a device or devices are unplugged from the domain, this +is reflected in the sysfs tree immediately, and the device(s) +removed from the system. + +The structure domain_device describes any device in the SAS +domain. It is completely managed by the SAS layer. A task +points to a domain device, this is how the SAS LLDD knows +where to send the task(s) to. A SAS LLDD only reads the +contents of the domain_device structure, but it never creates +or destroys one. + +Expander management from User Space +----------------------------------- + +In each expander directory in sysfs, there is a file called +"smp_portal". It is a binary sysfs attribute file, which +implements an SMP portal (Note: this is *NOT* an SMP port), +to which user space applications can send SMP requests and +receive SMP responses. + +Functionality is deceptively simple: + +1. Build the SMP frame you want to send. The format and layout + is described in the SAS spec. Leave the CRC field equal 0. +open(2) +2. Open the expander's SMP portal sysfs file in RW mode. +write(2) +3. Write the frame you built in 1. +read(2) +4. Read the amount of data you expect to receive for the frame you built. + If you receive different amount of data you expected to receive, + then there was some kind of error. +close(2) +All this process is shown in detail in the function do_smp_func() +and its callers, in the file "expander_conf.c". + +The kernel functionality is implemented in the file +"sas_expander.c". + +The program "expander_conf.c" implements this. It takes one +argument, the sysfs file name of the SMP portal to the +expander, and gives expander information, including routing +tables. + +The SMP portal gives you complete control of the expander, +so please be careful. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/link_power_management_policy.txt b/Documentation/scsi/link_power_management_policy.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d18993d0188 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/link_power_management_policy.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +This parameter allows the user to set the link (interface) power management. +There are 3 possible options: + +Value Effect +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +min_power Tell the controller to try to make the link use the + least possible power when possible. This may + sacrifice some performance due to increased latency + when coming out of lower power states. + +max_performance Generally, this means no power management. Tell + the controller to have performance be a priority + over power management. + +medium_power Tell the controller to enter a lower power state + when possible, but do not enter the lowest power + state, thus improving latency over min_power setting. + + diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt b/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt index 4dbe41370a6..5741ea8aa88 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Cable pull and temporary device Loss: being removed, a switch rebooting, or a device reboot), the driver could hide the disappearance of the device from the midlayer. I/O's issued to the LLDD would simply be queued for a short duration, allowing the device - to reappear or link come back alive, with no inadvertant side effects + to reappear or link come back alive, with no inadvertent side effects to the system. If the driver did not hide these conditions, i/o would be errored by the driver, the mid-layer would exhaust its retries, and the device would be taken offline. Manual intervention would be required to diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/megaraid.txt b/Documentation/scsi/megaraid.txt index ff864c0f494..3c7cea51e68 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/megaraid.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/megaraid.txt @@ -4,11 +4,11 @@ Overview: -------- -Different classes of controllers from LSI Logic, accept and respond to the +Different classes of controllers from LSI Logic accept and respond to the user applications in a similar way. They understand the same firmware control commands. Furthermore, the applications also can treat different classes of the controllers uniformly. Hence it is logical to have a single module that -interefaces with the applications on one side and all the low level drivers +interfaces with the applications on one side and all the low level drivers on the other. The advantages, though obvious, are listed for completeness: diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ncr53c7xx.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ncr53c7xx.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 91e9552d63e..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ncr53c7xx.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -README for WarpEngine/A4000T/A4091 SCSI kernels. - -Use the following options to disable options in the SCSI driver. - -Using amiboot for example..... - -To disable Synchronous Negotiation.... - - amiboot -k kernel 53c7xx=nosync:0 - -To disable Disconnection.... - - amiboot -k kernel 53c7xx=nodisconnect:0 - -To disable certain SCSI devices... - - amiboot -k kernel 53c7xx=validids:0x3F - - this allows only device ID's 0,1,2,3,4 and 5 for linux to handle. - (this is a bitmasked field - i.e. each bit represents a SCSI ID) - -These commands work on a per controller basis and use the option 'next' to -move to the next controller in the system. - -e.g. - amiboot -k kernel 53c7xx=nodisconnect:0,next,nosync:0 - - this uses No Disconnection on the first controller and Asynchronous - SCSI on the second controller. - -Known Issues: - -Two devices are known not to function with the default settings of using -synchronous SCSI. These are the Archive Viper 150 Tape Drive and the -SyQuest SQ555 removeable hard drive. When using these devices on a controller -use the 'nosync:0' option. - -Please try these options and post any problems/successes to me. - -Alan Hourihane <alanh@fairlite.demon.co.uk> diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ncr53c8xx.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ncr53c8xx.txt index 822d2aca370..cda5f8fa2c6 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ncr53c8xx.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ncr53c8xx.txt @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Written by Gerard Roudier <groudier@free.fr> 15. SCSI problem troubleshooting 15.1 Problem tracking 15.2 Understanding hardware error reports -16. Synchonous transfer negotiation tables +16. Synchronous transfer negotiation tables 16.1 Synchronous timings for 53C875 and 53C860 Ultra-SCSI controllers 16.2 Synchronous timings for fast SCSI-2 53C8XX controllers 17. Serial NVRAM support (by Richard Waltham) @@ -96,10 +96,10 @@ The original driver has been written for 386bsd and FreeBSD by: It is now available as a bundle of 2 drivers: - ncr53c8xx generic driver that supports all the SYM53C8XX family including - the ealiest 810 rev. 1, the latest 896 (2 channel LVD SCSI controller) and + the earliest 810 rev. 1, the latest 896 (2 channel LVD SCSI controller) and the new 895A (1 channel LVD SCSI controller). - sym53c8xx enhanced driver (a.k.a. 896 drivers) that drops support of oldest - chips in order to gain advantage of new features, as LOAD/STORE intructions + chips in order to gain advantage of new features, as LOAD/STORE instructions available since the 810A and hardware phase mismatch available with the 896 and the 895A. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ SCSI standard documentations are available at SYMBIOS ftp server: ftp://ftp.symbios.com/ -Usefull SCSI tools written by Eric Youngdale are available at tsx-11: +Useful SCSI tools written by Eric Youngdale are available at tsx-11: ftp://tsx-11.mit.edu/pub/linux/ALPHA/scsi/scsiinfo-X.Y.tar.gz ftp://tsx-11.mit.edu/pub/linux/ALPHA/scsi/scsidev-X.Y.tar.gz @@ -206,8 +206,8 @@ of MOVE MEMORY instructions. The 896 and the 895A allows handling of the phase mismatch context from SCRIPTS (avoids the phase mismatch interrupt that stops the SCSI processor until the C code has saved the context of the transfer). -Implementing this without using LOAD/STORE instructions would be painfull -and I did'nt even want to try it. +Implementing this without using LOAD/STORE instructions would be painful +and I didn't even want to try it. The 896 chip supports 64 bit PCI transactions and addressing, while the 895A supports 32 bit PCI transactions and 64 bit addressing. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ characteristics. This feature may also reduce average command latency. In order to really gain advantage of this feature, devices must have a reasonable cache size (No miracle is to be expected for a low-end hard disk with 128 KB or less). -Some kown SCSI devices do not properly support tagged command queuing. +Some known SCSI devices do not properly support tagged command queuing. Generally, firmware revisions that fix this kind of problems are available at respective vendor web/ftp sites. All I can say is that the hard disks I use on my machines behave well with @@ -562,11 +562,6 @@ if only one has a flaw for some SCSI feature, you can disable the support by the driver of this feature at linux start-up and enable this feature after boot-up only for devices that support it safely. -CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C8XX_PROFILE_SUPPORT (default answer: n) - This option must be set for profiling information to be gathered - and printed out through the proc file system. This features may - impact performances. - CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C8XX_IOMAPPED (default answer: n) Answer "y" if you suspect your mother board to not allow memory mapped I/O. May slow down performance a little. This option is required by @@ -631,8 +626,8 @@ string variable using 'insmod'. A boot setup command for the ncr53c8xx (sym53c8xx) driver begins with the driver name "ncr53c8xx="(sym53c8xx). The kernel syntax parser then expects -an optionnal list of integers separated with comma followed by an optional -list of comma-separated strings. Example of boot setup command under lilo +an optional list of integers separated with comma followed by an optional +list of comma-separated strings. Example of boot setup command under lilo prompt: lilo: linux root=/dev/hda2 ncr53c8xx=tags:4,sync:10,debug:0x200 @@ -778,7 +773,7 @@ port address 0x1400. Some scsi boards use a 875 (ultra wide) and only supply narrow connectors. If you have connected a wide device with a 50 pins to 68 pins cable converter, any accepted wide negotiation will break further data transfers. - In such a case, using "wide:0" in the bootup command will be helpfull. + In such a case, using "wide:0" in the bootup command will be helpful. 10.2.14 Differential mode diff:0 never set up diff mode @@ -790,8 +785,8 @@ port address 0x1400. irqm:0 always open drain irqm:1 same as initial settings (assumed BIOS settings) irqm:2 always totem pole - irqm:0x10 driver will not use SA_SHIRQ flag when requesting irq - irqm:0x20 driver will not use SA_INTERRUPT flag when requesting irq + irqm:0x10 driver will not use IRQF_SHARED flag when requesting irq + irqm:0x20 driver will not use IRQF_DISABLED flag when requesting irq (Bits 0x10 and 0x20 can be combined with hardware irq mode option) @@ -899,7 +894,7 @@ boot setup can be: ncr53c8xx=safe:y,mpar:y ncr53c8xx=safe:y -My personnal system works flawlessly with the following equivalent setup: +My personal system works flawlessly with the following equivalent setup: ncr53c8xx=mpar:y,spar:y,disc:y,specf:1,fsn:n,ultra:2,fsn:n,revprob:n,verb:1\ tags:32,sync:12,debug:0,burst:7,led:1,wide:1,settle:2,diff:0,irqm:0 @@ -1151,7 +1146,7 @@ Driver files: New driver versions are made available separately in order to allow testing changes and new features prior to including them into the linux kernel -distribution. The following URL provides informations on latest avalaible +distribution. The following URL provides information on latest available patches: ftp://ftp.tux.org/pub/people/gerard-roudier/README @@ -1241,15 +1236,15 @@ when the SCSI DATA IN phase is reentered after a phase mismatch. When an IRQ is shared by devices that are handled by different drivers, it may happen that one driver complains about the request of the IRQ having failed. Inder Linux-2.0, this may be due to one driver having requested the -IRQ using the SA_INTERRUPT flag but some other having requested the same IRQ +IRQ using the IRQF_DISABLED flag but some other having requested the same IRQ without this flag. Under both Linux-2.0 and linux-2.2, this may be caused by -one driver not having requested the IRQ with the SA_SHIRQ flag. +one driver not having requested the IRQ with the IRQF_SHARED flag. By default, the ncr53c8xx and sym53c8xx drivers request IRQs with both the -SA_INTERRUPT and the SA_SHIRQ flag under Linux-2.0 and with only the SA_SHIRQ +IRQF_DISABLED and the IRQF_SHARED flag under Linux-2.0 and with only the IRQF_SHARED flag under Linux-2.2. -Under Linux-2.0, you can disable use of SA_INTERRUPT flag from the boot +Under Linux-2.0, you can disable use of IRQF_DISABLED flag from the boot command line by using the following option: ncr53c8xx=irqm:0x20 (for the generic ncr53c8xx driver) @@ -1257,7 +1252,7 @@ command line by using the following option: If this does not fix the problem, then you may want to check how all other drivers are requesting the IRQ and report the problem. Note that if at least -a single driver does not request the IRQ with the SA_SHIRQ flag (share IRQ), +a single driver does not request the IRQ with the IRQF_SHARED flag (share IRQ), then the request of the IRQ obviously will not succeed for all the drivers. 15. SCSI problem troubleshooting @@ -1265,7 +1260,7 @@ then the request of the IRQ obviously will not succeed for all the drivers. 15.1 Problem tracking Most SCSI problems are due to a non conformant SCSI bus or to buggy -devices. If infortunately you have SCSI problems, you can check the +devices. If unfortunately you have SCSI problems, you can check the following things: - SCSI bus cables @@ -1382,7 +1377,7 @@ SCSI standards, chip cores functionnals and internal driver data structures. You are not required to decode and understand them, unless you want to help maintain the driver code. -16. Synchonous transfer negotiation tables +16. Synchronous transfer negotiation tables Tables below have been created by calling the routine the driver uses for synchronisation negotiation timing calculation and chip setting. @@ -1484,7 +1479,7 @@ Wide16 SCSI. Enabling serial NVRAM support enables detection of the serial NVRAM included on Symbios and some Symbios compatible host adaptors, and Tekram boards. The serial NVRAM is used by Symbios and Tekram to hold set up parameters for the -host adaptor and it's attached drives. +host adaptor and its attached drives. The Symbios NVRAM also holds data on the boot order of host adaptors in a system with more than one host adaptor. This enables the order of scanning diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/osd.txt b/Documentation/scsi/osd.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..da162f7fd5f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/osd.txt @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ +The OSD Standard +================ +OSD (Object-Based Storage Device) is a T10 SCSI command set that is designed +to provide efficient operation of input/output logical units that manage the +allocation, placement, and accessing of variable-size data-storage containers, +called objects. Objects are intended to contain operating system and application +constructs. Each object has associated attributes attached to it, which are +integral part of the object and provide metadata about the object. The standard +defines some common obligatory attributes, but user attributes can be added as +needed. + +See: http://www.t10.org/ftp/t10/drafts/osd2/ for the latest draft for OSD 2 +or search the web for "OSD SCSI" + +OSD in the Linux Kernel +======================= +osd-initiator: + The main component of OSD in Kernel is the osd-initiator library. Its main +user is intended to be the pNFS-over-objects layout driver, which uses objects +as its back-end data storage. Other clients are the other osd parts listed below. + +osd-uld: + This is a SCSI ULD that registers for OSD type devices and provides a testing +platform, both for the in-kernel initiator as well as connected targets. It +currently has no useful user-mode API, though it could have if need be. + +exofs: + Is an OSD based Linux file system. It uses the osd-initiator and osd-uld, +to export a usable file system for users. +See Documentation/filesystems/exofs.txt for more details + +osd target: + There are no current plans for an OSD target implementation in kernel. For all +needs, a user-mode target that is based on the scsi tgt target framework is +available from Ohio Supercomputer Center (OSC) at: +http://www.open-osd.org/bin/view/Main/OscOsdProject +There are several other target implementations. See http://open-osd.org for more +links. + +Files and Folders +================= +This is the complete list of files included in this work: +include/scsi/ + osd_initiator.h Main API for the initiator library + osd_types.h Common OSD types + osd_sec.h Security Manager API + osd_protocol.h Wire definitions of the OSD standard protocol + osd_attributes.h Wire definitions of OSD attributes + +drivers/scsi/osd/ + osd_initiator.c OSD-Initiator library implementation + osd_uld.c The OSD scsi ULD + osd_ktest.{h,c} In-kernel test suite (called by osd_uld) + osd_debug.h Some printk macros + Makefile For both in-tree and out-of-tree compilation + Kconfig Enables inclusion of the different pieces + osd_test.c User-mode application to call the kernel tests + +The OSD-Initiator Library +========================= +osd_initiator is a low level implementation of an osd initiator encoder. +But even though, it should be intuitive and easy to use. Perhaps over time an +higher lever will form that automates some of the more common recipes. + +init/fini: +- osd_dev_init() associates a scsi_device with an osd_dev structure + and initializes some global pools. This should be done once per scsi_device + (OSD LUN). The osd_dev structure is needed for calling osd_start_request(). + +- osd_dev_fini() cleans up before a osd_dev/scsi_device destruction. + +OSD commands encoding, execution, and decoding of results: + +struct osd_request's is used to iteratively encode an OSD command and carry +its state throughout execution. Each request goes through these stages: + +a. osd_start_request() allocates the request. + +b. Any of the osd_req_* methods is used to encode a request of the specified + type. + +c. osd_req_add_{get,set}_attr_* may be called to add get/set attributes to the + CDB. "List" or "Page" mode can be used exclusively. The attribute-list API + can be called multiple times on the same request. However, only one + attribute-page can be read, as mandated by the OSD standard. + +d. osd_finalize_request() computes offsets into the data-in and data-out buffers + and signs the request using the provided capability key and integrity- + check parameters. + +e. osd_execute_request() may be called to execute the request via the block + layer and wait for its completion. The request can be executed + asynchronously by calling the block layer API directly. + +f. After execution, osd_req_decode_sense() can be called to decode the request's + sense information. + +g. osd_req_decode_get_attr() may be called to retrieve osd_add_get_attr_list() + values. + +h. osd_end_request() must be called to deallocate the request and any resource + associated with it. Note that osd_end_request cleans up the request at any + stage and it must always be called after a successful osd_start_request(). + +osd_request's structure: + +The OSD standard defines a complex structure of IO segments pointed to by +members in the CDB. Up to 3 segments can be deployed in the IN-Buffer and up to +4 in the OUT-Buffer. The ASCII illustration below depicts a secure-read with +associated get+set of attributes-lists. Other combinations very on the same +basic theme. From no-segments-used up to all-segments-used. + +|________OSD-CDB__________| +| | +|read_len (offset=0) -|---------\ +| | | +|get_attrs_list_length | | +|get_attrs_list_offset -|----\ | +| | | | +|retrieved_attrs_alloc_len| | | +|retrieved_attrs_offset -|----|----|-\ +| | | | | +|set_attrs_list_length | | | | +|set_attrs_list_offset -|-\ | | | +| | | | | | +|in_data_integ_offset -|-|--|----|-|-\ +|out_data_integ_offset -|-|--|--\ | | | +\_________________________/ | | | | | | + | | | | | | +|_______OUT-BUFFER________| | | | | | | +| Set attr list |</ | | | | | +| | | | | | | +|-------------------------| | | | | | +| Get attr descriptors |<---/ | | | | +| | | | | | +|-------------------------| | | | | +| Out-data integrity |<------/ | | | +| | | | | +\_________________________/ | | | + | | | +|________IN-BUFFER________| | | | +| In-Data read |<--------/ | | +| | | | +|-------------------------| | | +| Get attr list |<----------/ | +| | | +|-------------------------| | +| In-data integrity |<------------/ +| | +\_________________________/ + +A block device request can carry bidirectional payload by means of associating +a bidi_read request with a main write-request. Each in/out request is described +by a chain of BIOs associated with each request. +The CDB is of a SCSI VARLEN CDB format, as described by OSD standard. +The OSD standard also mandates alignment restrictions at start of each segment. + +In the code, in struct osd_request, there are two _osd_io_info structures to +describe the IN/OUT buffers above, two BIOs for the data payload and up to five +_osd_req_data_segment structures to hold the different segments allocation and +information. + +Important: We have chosen to disregard the assumption that a BIO-chain (and +the resulting sg-list) describes a linear memory buffer. Meaning only first and +last scatter chain can be incomplete and all the middle chains are of PAGE_SIZE. +For us, a scatter-gather-list, as its name implies and as used by the Networking +layer, is to describe a vector of buffers that will be transferred to/from the +wire. It works very well with current iSCSI transport. iSCSI is currently the +only deployed OSD transport. In the future we anticipate SAS and FC attached OSD +devices as well. + +The OSD Testing ULD +=================== +TODO: More user-mode control on tests. + +Authors, Mailing list +===================== +Please communicate with us on any deployment of osd, whether using this code +or not. + +Any problems, questions, bug reports, lonely OSD nights, please email: + OSD Dev List <osd-dev@open-osd.org> + +More up-to-date information can be found on: +http://open-osd.org + +Boaz Harrosh <bharrosh@panasas.com> +Benny Halevy <bhalevy@panasas.com> + +References +========== +Weber, R., "SCSI Object-Based Storage Device Commands", +T10/1355-D ANSI/INCITS 400-2004, +http://www.t10.org/ftp/t10/drafts/osd/osd-r10.pdf + +Weber, R., "SCSI Object-Based Storage Device Commands -2 (OSD-2)" +T10/1729-D, Working Draft, rev. 3 +http://www.t10.org/ftp/t10/drafts/osd2/osd2r03.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/osst.txt b/Documentation/scsi/osst.txt index ce574e7791a..00c8ebb2fd1 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/osst.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/osst.txt @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ behavior looks very much the same as st to the userspace applications. History ------- -In the first place, osst shared it's identity very much with st. That meant +In the first place, osst shared its identity very much with st. That meant that it used the same kernel structures and the same device node as st. So you could only have either of them being present in the kernel. This has been fixed by registering an own device, now. @@ -56,8 +56,7 @@ Compile your kernel and install the modules. Now, your osst driver is inside the kernel or available as a module, depending on your choice during kernel config. You may still need to create -the device nodes by calling the Makedevs.sh script (see below) manually, -unless you use a devfs kernel, where this won't be needed. +the device nodes by calling the Makedevs.sh script (see below) manually. To load your module, you may use the command modprobe osst @@ -67,7 +66,7 @@ recognized. If you want to have the module autoloaded on access to /dev/osst, you may add something like alias char-major-206 osst -to your /etc/modprobe.conf (before 2.6: modules.conf). +to a file under /etc/modprobe.d/ directory. You may find it convenient to create a symbolic link ln -s nosst0 /dev/tape @@ -136,7 +135,7 @@ The driver development is coordinated through a mailing list a CVS repository and some web pages. The tester's pages which contain recent news and updated drivers to download can be found on -http://linux1.onstream.nl/test/ +http://sourceforge.net/projects/osst/ If you find any problems, please have a look at the tester's page in order to see whether the problem is already known and solved. Otherwise, please diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ppa.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ppa.txt index 0dac88d86d8..05ff47dbe8d 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ppa.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ppa.txt @@ -1,16 +1,14 @@ -------- Terse where to get ZIP Drive help info -------- General Iomega ZIP drive page for Linux: -http://www.torque.net/~campbell/ +http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.torque.net/~campbell/ -Driver achive for old drivers: -http://www.torque.net/~campbell/ppa/ +Driver archive for old drivers: +http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.torque.net/~campbell/ppa Linux Parport page (parallel port) -http://www.torque.net/parport/ +http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.torque.net/parport/ Email list for Linux Parport linux-parport@torque.net -Email for problems with ZIP or ZIP Plus drivers -campbell@torque.net diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt index c132687b017..ade046ea7c1 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ changers. But it allows to handle nearly all possible cases. It knows media transport - this one shuffles around the media, i.e. the transport arm. Also known as "picker". storage - a slot which can hold a media. - import/export - the same as above, but is accessable from outside, + import/export - the same as above, but is accessible from outside, i.e. there the operator (you !) can use this to fill in and remove media from the changer. Sometimes named "mailslot". @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ If the module finds the changer, it prints some messages about the device [ try "dmesg" if you don't see anything ] and should show up in /proc/devices. If not.... some changers use ID ? / LUN 0 for the device and ID ? / LUN 1 for the robot mechanism. But Linux does *not* -look for LUN's other than 0 as default, becauce there are to many +look for LUNs other than 0 as default, because there are too many broken devices. So you can try: 1) echo "scsi add-single-device 0 0 ID 1" > /proc/scsi/scsi @@ -102,12 +102,12 @@ Trouble? If you insmod the driver with "insmod debug=1", it will be verbose and prints a lot of stuff to the syslog. Compiling the kernel with -CONFIG_SCSI_CONSTANTS=y improves the quality of the error messages alot +CONFIG_SCSI_CONSTANTS=y improves the quality of the error messages a lot because the kernel will translate the error codes into human-readable strings then. You can display these messages with the dmesg command (or check the -logfiles). If you email me some question becauce of a problem with the +logfiles). If you email me some question because of a problem with the driver, please include these messages. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi-generic.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi-generic.txt index c38e2b3648e..51be20a6a14 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi-generic.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi-generic.txt @@ -34,11 +34,11 @@ http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/SCSI-Generic-HOWTO This describes the sg version 3 driver found in the lk 2.4 series. The LDP renders documents in single and multiple page HTML, postscript and pdf. This document can also be found at: -http://www.torque.net/sg/p/sg_v3_ho.html +http://sg.danny.cz/sg/p/sg_v3_ho.html Documentation for the version 2 sg driver found in the lk 2.2 series can -be found at http://www.torque.net/sg/p/scsi-generic.txt . A larger version -is at: http://www.torque.net/sg/p/scsi-generic_long.txt . +be found at http://sg.danny.cz/sg/. A larger version +is at: http://sg.danny.cz/sg/p/scsi-generic_long.txt. The original documentation for the sg driver (prior to lk 2.2.6) can be found at http://www.torque.net/sg/p/original/SCSI-Programming-HOWTO.txt @@ -61,8 +61,8 @@ There are two packages of sg utilities: - sg_utils for the sg version 2 (and original) driver found in lk 2.2 and earlier Both packages will work in the lk 2.4 series however sg3_utils offers more -capabilities. They can be found at: http://www.torque.net/sg and -freshmeat.net +capabilities. They can be found at: http://sg.danny.cz/sg/sg3_utils.html and +freecode.com Another approach is to look at the applications that use the sg driver. These include cdrecord, cdparanoia, SANE and cdrdao. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi-parameters.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi-parameters.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2bfd6f6d2d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi-parameters.txt @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + SCSI Kernel Parameters + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +See Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt for general information on +specifying module parameters. + +This document may not be entirely up to date and comprehensive. The command +"modinfo -p ${modulename}" shows a current list of all parameters of a loadable +module. Loadable modules, after being loaded into the running kernel, also +reveal their parameters in /sys/module/${modulename}/parameters/. Some of these +parameters may be changed at runtime by the command +"echo -n ${value} > /sys/module/${modulename}/parameters/${parm}". + + + advansys= [HW,SCSI] + See header of drivers/scsi/advansys.c. + + aha152x= [HW,SCSI] + See Documentation/scsi/aha152x.txt. + + aha1542= [HW,SCSI] + Format: <portbase>[,<buson>,<busoff>[,<dmaspeed>]] + + aic7xxx= [HW,SCSI] + See Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx.txt. + + aic79xx= [HW,SCSI] + See Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt. + + atascsi= [HW,SCSI] Atari SCSI + + BusLogic= [HW,SCSI] + See drivers/scsi/BusLogic.c, comment before function + BusLogic_ParseDriverOptions(). + + dtc3181e= [HW,SCSI] + + eata= [HW,SCSI] + + fdomain= [HW,SCSI] + See header of drivers/scsi/fdomain.c. + + gdth= [HW,SCSI] + See header of drivers/scsi/gdth.c. + + gvp11= [HW,SCSI] + + in2000= [HW,SCSI] + See header of drivers/scsi/in2000.c. + + ips= [HW,SCSI] Adaptec / IBM ServeRAID controller + See header of drivers/scsi/ips.c. + + mac5380= [HW,SCSI] Format: + <can_queue>,<cmd_per_lun>,<sg_tablesize>,<hostid>,<use_tags> + + max_luns= [SCSI] Maximum number of LUNs to probe. + Should be between 1 and 2^32-1. + + max_report_luns= + [SCSI] Maximum number of LUNs received. + Should be between 1 and 16384. + + NCR_D700= [HW,SCSI] + See header of drivers/scsi/NCR_D700.c. + + ncr5380= [HW,SCSI] + + ncr53c400= [HW,SCSI] + + ncr53c400a= [HW,SCSI] + + ncr53c406a= [HW,SCSI] + + ncr53c8xx= [HW,SCSI] + + nodisconnect [HW,SCSI,M68K] Disables SCSI disconnects. + + osst= [HW,SCSI] SCSI Tape Driver + Format: <buffer_size>,<write_threshold> + See also Documentation/scsi/st.txt. + + pas16= [HW,SCSI] + See header of drivers/scsi/pas16.c. + + scsi_debug_*= [SCSI] + See drivers/scsi/scsi_debug.c. + + scsi_default_dev_flags= + [SCSI] SCSI default device flags + Format: <integer> + + scsi_dev_flags= [SCSI] Black/white list entry for vendor and model + Format: <vendor>:<model>:<flags> + (flags are integer value) + + scsi_logging_level= [SCSI] a bit mask of logging levels + See drivers/scsi/scsi_logging.h for bits. Also + settable via sysctl at dev.scsi.logging_level + (/proc/sys/dev/scsi/logging_level). + There is also a nice 'scsi_logging_level' script in the + S390-tools package, available for download at + http://www-128.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/linux390/s390-tools-1.5.4.html + + scsi_mod.scan= [SCSI] sync (default) scans SCSI busses as they are + discovered. async scans them in kernel threads, + allowing boot to proceed. none ignores them, expecting + user space to do the scan. + + sim710= [SCSI,HW] + See header of drivers/scsi/sim710.c. + + st= [HW,SCSI] SCSI tape parameters (buffers, etc.) + See Documentation/scsi/st.txt. + + sym53c416= [HW,SCSI] + See header of drivers/scsi/sym53c416.c. + + t128= [HW,SCSI] + See header of drivers/scsi/t128.c. + + tmscsim= [HW,SCSI] + See comment before function dc390_setup() in + drivers/scsi/tmscsim.c. + + u14-34f= [HW,SCSI] UltraStor 14F/34F SCSI host adapter + See header of drivers/scsi/u14-34f.c. + + wd33c93= [HW,SCSI] + See header of drivers/scsi/wd33c93.c. + + wd7000= [HW,SCSI] + See header of drivers/scsi/wd7000.c. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi.txt index dd1bbf4e98e..3d99d38cb62 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi.txt @@ -4,8 +4,8 @@ The Linux Documentation Project (LDP) maintains a document describing the SCSI subsystem in the Linux kernel (lk) 2.4 series. See: http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/SCSI-2.4-HOWTO . The LDP has single and multiple page HTML renderings as well as postscript and pdf. -It can also be found at http://www.torque.net/scsi/SCSI-2.4-HOWTO . - +It can also be found at: +http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.torque.net/scsi/SCSI-2.4-HOWTO Notes on using modules in the SCSI subsystem ============================================ diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt index 331afd791cb..a0c85110a07 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt @@ -19,9 +19,9 @@ TABLE OF CONTENTS [2-1-1] Overview [2-1-2] Flow of scmds through EH [2-1-3] Flow of control - [2-2] EH through hostt->eh_strategy_handler() - [2-2-1] Pre hostt->eh_strategy_handler() SCSI midlayer conditions - [2-2-2] Post hostt->eh_strategy_handler() SCSI midlayer conditions + [2-2] EH through transportt->eh_strategy_handler() + [2-2-1] Pre transportt->eh_strategy_handler() SCSI midlayer conditions + [2-2-2] Post transportt->eh_strategy_handler() SCSI midlayer conditions [2-2-3] Things to consider @@ -42,20 +42,14 @@ discussion. Once LLDD gets hold of a scmd, either the LLDD will complete the command by calling scsi_done callback passed from midlayer when -invoking hostt->queuecommand() or SCSI midlayer will time it out. +invoking hostt->queuecommand() or the block layer will time it out. [1-2-1] Completing a scmd w/ scsi_done For all non-EH commands, scsi_done() is the completion callback. It -does the following. - - 1. Delete timeout timer. If it fails, it means that timeout timer - has expired and is going to finish the command. Just return. - - 2. Link scmd to per-cpu scsi_done_q using scmd->en_entry - - 3. Raise SCSI_SOFTIRQ +just calls blk_complete_request() to delete the block layer timer and +raise SCSI_SOFTIRQ SCSI_SOFTIRQ handler scsi_softirq calls scsi_decide_disposition() to determine what to do with the command. scsi_decide_disposition() @@ -64,10 +58,12 @@ with the command. - SUCCESS scsi_finish_command() is invoked for the command. The - function does some maintenance choirs and notify completion by - calling scmd->done() callback, which, for fs requests, would - be HLD completion callback - sd:sd_rw_intr, sr:rw_intr, - st:st_intr. + function does some maintenance chores and then calls + scsi_io_completion() to finish the I/O. + scsi_io_completion() then notifies the block layer on + the completed request by calling blk_end_request and + friends or figures out what to do with the remainder + of the data in case of an error. - NEEDS_RETRY - ADD_TO_MLQUEUE @@ -75,7 +71,7 @@ with the command. - otherwise scsi_eh_scmd_add(scmd, 0) is invoked for the command. See - [1-3] for details of this funciton. + [1-3] for details of this function. [1-2-2] Completing a scmd w/ timeout @@ -86,33 +82,45 @@ function 1. invokes optional hostt->eh_timed_out() callback. Return value can be one of - - EH_HANDLED - This indicates that eh_timed_out() dealt with the timeout. The - scmd is passed to __scsi_done() and thus linked into per-cpu - scsi_done_q. Normal command completion described in [1-2-1] - follows. + - BLK_EH_HANDLED + This indicates that eh_timed_out() dealt with the timeout. + The command is passed back to the block layer and completed + via __blk_complete_requests(). + + *NOTE* After returning BLK_EH_HANDLED the SCSI layer is + assumed to be finished with the command, and no other + functions from the SCSI layer will be called. So this + should typically only be returned if the eh_timed_out() + handler raced with normal completion. - - EH_RESET_TIMER + - BLK_EH_RESET_TIMER This indicates that more time is required to finish the command. Timer is restarted. This action is counted as a retry and only allowed scmd->allowed + 1(!) times. Once the - limit is reached, action for EH_NOT_HANDLED is taken instead. + limit is reached, action for BLK_EH_NOT_HANDLED is taken instead. - *NOTE* This action is racy as the LLDD could finish the scmd - after the timeout has expired but before it's added back. In - such cases, scsi_done() would think that timeout has occurred - and return without doing anything. We lose completion and the - command will time out again. - - - EH_NOT_HANDLED - This is the same as when eh_timed_out() callback doesn't exist. + - BLK_EH_NOT_HANDLED + eh_timed_out() callback did not handle the command. Step #2 is taken. + 2. If the host supports asynchronous completion (as indicated by the + no_async_abort setting in the host template) scsi_abort_command() + is invoked to schedule an asynchrous abort. If that fails + Step #3 is taken. + 2. scsi_eh_scmd_add(scmd, SCSI_EH_CANCEL_CMD) is invoked for the command. See [1-3] for more information. +[1-3] Asynchronous command aborts + + After a timeout occurs a command abort is scheduled from + scsi_abort_command(). If the abort is successful the command + will either be retried (if the number of retries is not exhausted) + or terminated with DID_TIME_OUT. + Otherwise scsi_eh_scmd_add() is invoked for the command. + See [1-4] for more information. -[1-3] How EH takes over +[1-4] How EH takes over scmds enter EH via scsi_eh_scmd_add(), which does the following. @@ -160,7 +168,7 @@ ways. - Fine-grained EH callbacks LLDD can implement fine-grained EH callbacks and let SCSI midlayer drive error handling and call appropriate callbacks. - This will be dicussed further in [2-1]. + This will be discussed further in [2-1]. - eh_strategy_handler() callback This is one big callback which should perform whole error @@ -194,7 +202,7 @@ lower layers and lower layers are ready to process or fail the scmd again. To achieve these goals, EH performs recovery actions with increasing -severity. Some actions are performed by issueing SCSI commands and +severity. Some actions are performed by issuing SCSI commands and others are performed by invoking one of the following fine-grained hostt EH callbacks. Callbacks may be omitted and omitted ones are considered to fail always. @@ -290,7 +298,7 @@ scmd->allowed. SCSI transports/LLDDs automatically acquire sense data on command failures (autosense). Autosense is recommended for performance reasons and as sense information could get out of - sync inbetween occurrence of CHECK CONDITION and this action. + sync between occurrence of CHECK CONDITION and this action. Note that if autosense is not supported, scmd->sense_buffer contains invalid sense data when error-completing the scmd @@ -320,7 +328,8 @@ scmd->allowed. <<scsi_eh_abort_cmds>> - This action is taken for each timed out command. + This action is taken for each timed out command when + no_async_abort is enabled in the host template. hostt->eh_abort_handler() is invoked for each scmd. The handler returns SUCCESS if it has succeeded to make LLDD and all related hardware forget about the scmd. @@ -413,9 +422,9 @@ scmd->allowed. layer of failure of the scmds. -[2-2] EH through hostt->eh_strategy_handler() +[2-2] EH through transportt->eh_strategy_handler() - hostt->eh_strategy_handler() is invoked in the place of + transportt->eh_strategy_handler() is invoked in the place of scsi_unjam_host() and it is responsible for whole recovery process. On completion, the handler should have made lower layers forget about all failed scmds and either ready for new commands or offline. Also, @@ -424,7 +433,7 @@ SCSI midlayer. IOW, of the steps described in [2-1-2], all steps except for #1 must be implemented by eh_strategy_handler(). -[2-2-1] Pre hostt->eh_strategy_handler() SCSI midlayer conditions +[2-2-1] Pre transportt->eh_strategy_handler() SCSI midlayer conditions The following conditions are true on entry to the handler. @@ -437,7 +446,7 @@ except for #1 must be implemented by eh_strategy_handler(). - shost->host_failed == shost->host_busy -[2-2-2] Post hostt->eh_strategy_handler() SCSI midlayer conditions +[2-2-2] Post transportt->eh_strategy_handler() SCSI midlayer conditions The following conditions must be true on exit from the handler. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f79282fc48d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt @@ -0,0 +1,496 @@ + SCSI FC Tansport + ============================================= + +Date: 11/18/2008 +Kernel Revisions for features: + rports : <<TBS>> + vports : 2.6.22 + bsg support : 2.6.30 (?TBD?) + + +Introduction +============ +This file documents the features and components of the SCSI FC Transport. +It also provides documents the API between the transport and FC LLDDs. +The FC transport can be found at: + drivers/scsi/scsi_transport_fc.c + include/scsi/scsi_transport_fc.h + include/scsi/scsi_netlink_fc.h + include/scsi/scsi_bsg_fc.h + +This file is found at Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt + + +FC Remote Ports (rports) +======================================================================== +<< To Be Supplied >> + + +FC Virtual Ports (vports) +======================================================================== + +Overview: +------------------------------- + + New FC standards have defined mechanisms which allows for a single physical + port to appear on as multiple communication ports. Using the N_Port Id + Virtualization (NPIV) mechanism, a point-to-point connection to a Fabric + can be assigned more than 1 N_Port_ID. Each N_Port_ID appears as a + separate port to other endpoints on the fabric, even though it shares one + physical link to the switch for communication. Each N_Port_ID can have a + unique view of the fabric based on fabric zoning and array lun-masking + (just like a normal non-NPIV adapter). Using the Virtual Fabric (VF) + mechanism, adding a fabric header to each frame allows the port to + interact with the Fabric Port to join multiple fabrics. The port will + obtain an N_Port_ID on each fabric it joins. Each fabric will have its + own unique view of endpoints and configuration parameters. NPIV may be + used together with VF so that the port can obtain multiple N_Port_IDs + on each virtual fabric. + + The FC transport is now recognizing a new object - a vport. A vport is + an entity that has a world-wide unique World Wide Port Name (wwpn) and + World Wide Node Name (wwnn). The transport also allows for the FC4's to + be specified for the vport, with FCP_Initiator being the primary role + expected. Once instantiated by one of the above methods, it will have a + distinct N_Port_ID and view of fabric endpoints and storage entities. + The fc_host associated with the physical adapter will export the ability + to create vports. The transport will create the vport object within the + Linux device tree, and instruct the fc_host's driver to instantiate the + virtual port. Typically, the driver will create a new scsi_host instance + on the vport, resulting in a unique <H,C,T,L> namespace for the vport. + Thus, whether a FC port is based on a physical port or on a virtual port, + each will appear as a unique scsi_host with its own target and lun space. + + Note: At this time, the transport is written to create only NPIV-based + vports. However, consideration was given to VF-based vports and it + should be a minor change to add support if needed. The remaining + discussion will concentrate on NPIV. + + Note: World Wide Name assignment (and uniqueness guarantees) are left + up to an administrative entity controlling the vport. For example, + if vports are to be associated with virtual machines, a XEN mgmt + utility would be responsible for creating wwpn/wwnn's for the vport, + using its own naming authority and OUI. (Note: it already does this + for virtual MAC addresses). + + +Device Trees and Vport Objects: +------------------------------- + + Today, the device tree typically contains the scsi_host object, + with rports and scsi target objects underneath it. Currently the FC + transport creates the vport object and places it under the scsi_host + object corresponding to the physical adapter. The LLDD will allocate + a new scsi_host for the vport and link its object under the vport. + The remainder of the tree under the vports scsi_host is the same + as the non-NPIV case. The transport is written currently to easily + allow the parent of the vport to be something other than the scsi_host. + This could be used in the future to link the object onto a vm-specific + device tree. If the vport's parent is not the physical port's scsi_host, + a symbolic link to the vport object will be placed in the physical + port's scsi_host. + + Here's what to expect in the device tree : + The typical Physical Port's Scsi_Host: + /sys/devices/.../host17/ + and it has the typical descendant tree: + /sys/devices/.../host17/rport-17:0-0/target17:0:0/17:0:0:0: + and then the vport is created on the Physical Port: + /sys/devices/.../host17/vport-17:0-0 + and the vport's Scsi_Host is then created: + /sys/devices/.../host17/vport-17:0-0/host18 + and then the rest of the tree progresses, such as: + /sys/devices/.../host17/vport-17:0-0/host18/rport-18:0-0/target18:0:0/18:0:0:0: + + Here's what to expect in the sysfs tree : + scsi_hosts: + /sys/class/scsi_host/host17 physical port's scsi_host + /sys/class/scsi_host/host18 vport's scsi_host + fc_hosts: + /sys/class/fc_host/host17 physical port's fc_host + /sys/class/fc_host/host18 vport's fc_host + fc_vports: + /sys/class/fc_vports/vport-17:0-0 the vport's fc_vport + fc_rports: + /sys/class/fc_remote_ports/rport-17:0-0 rport on the physical port + /sys/class/fc_remote_ports/rport-18:0-0 rport on the vport + + +Vport Attributes: +------------------------------- + + The new fc_vport class object has the following attributes + + node_name: Read_Only + The WWNN of the vport + + port_name: Read_Only + The WWPN of the vport + + roles: Read_Only + Indicates the FC4 roles enabled on the vport. + + symbolic_name: Read_Write + A string, appended to the driver's symbolic port name string, which + is registered with the switch to identify the vport. For example, + a hypervisor could set this string to "Xen Domain 2 VM 5 Vport 2", + and this set of identifiers can be seen on switch management screens + to identify the port. + + vport_delete: Write_Only + When written with a "1", will tear down the vport. + + vport_disable: Write_Only + When written with a "1", will transition the vport to a disabled. + state. The vport will still be instantiated with the Linux kernel, + but it will not be active on the FC link. + When written with a "0", will enable the vport. + + vport_last_state: Read_Only + Indicates the previous state of the vport. See the section below on + "Vport States". + + vport_state: Read_Only + Indicates the state of the vport. See the section below on + "Vport States". + + vport_type: Read_Only + Reflects the FC mechanism used to create the virtual port. + Only NPIV is supported currently. + + + For the fc_host class object, the following attributes are added for vports: + + max_npiv_vports: Read_Only + Indicates the maximum number of NPIV-based vports that the + driver/adapter can support on the fc_host. + + npiv_vports_inuse: Read_Only + Indicates how many NPIV-based vports have been instantiated on the + fc_host. + + vport_create: Write_Only + A "simple" create interface to instantiate a vport on an fc_host. + A "<WWPN>:<WWNN>" string is written to the attribute. The transport + then instantiates the vport object and calls the LLDD to create the + vport with the role of FCP_Initiator. Each WWN is specified as 16 + hex characters and may *not* contain any prefixes (e.g. 0x, x, etc). + + vport_delete: Write_Only + A "simple" delete interface to teardown a vport. A "<WWPN>:<WWNN>" + string is written to the attribute. The transport will locate the + vport on the fc_host with the same WWNs and tear it down. Each WWN + is specified as 16 hex characters and may *not* contain any prefixes + (e.g. 0x, x, etc). + + +Vport States: +------------------------------- + + Vport instantiation consists of two parts: + - Creation with the kernel and LLDD. This means all transport and + driver data structures are built up, and device objects created. + This is equivalent to a driver "attach" on an adapter, which is + independent of the adapter's link state. + - Instantiation of the vport on the FC link via ELS traffic, etc. + This is equivalent to a "link up" and successful link initialization. + Further information can be found in the interfaces section below for + Vport Creation. + + Once a vport has been instantiated with the kernel/LLDD, a vport state + can be reported via the sysfs attribute. The following states exist: + + FC_VPORT_UNKNOWN - Unknown + An temporary state, typically set only while the vport is being + instantiated with the kernel and LLDD. + + FC_VPORT_ACTIVE - Active + The vport has been successfully been created on the FC link. + It is fully functional. + + FC_VPORT_DISABLED - Disabled + The vport instantiated, but "disabled". The vport is not instantiated + on the FC link. This is equivalent to a physical port with the + link "down". + + FC_VPORT_LINKDOWN - Linkdown + The vport is not operational as the physical link is not operational. + + FC_VPORT_INITIALIZING - Initializing + The vport is in the process of instantiating on the FC link. + The LLDD will set this state just prior to starting the ELS traffic + to create the vport. This state will persist until the vport is + successfully created (state becomes FC_VPORT_ACTIVE) or it fails + (state is one of the values below). As this state is transitory, + it will not be preserved in the "vport_last_state". + + FC_VPORT_NO_FABRIC_SUPP - No Fabric Support + The vport is not operational. One of the following conditions were + encountered: + - The FC topology is not Point-to-Point + - The FC port is not connected to an F_Port + - The F_Port has indicated that NPIV is not supported. + + FC_VPORT_NO_FABRIC_RSCS - No Fabric Resources + The vport is not operational. The Fabric failed FDISC with a status + indicating that it does not have sufficient resources to complete + the operation. + + FC_VPORT_FABRIC_LOGOUT - Fabric Logout + The vport is not operational. The Fabric has LOGO'd the N_Port_ID + associated with the vport. + + FC_VPORT_FABRIC_REJ_WWN - Fabric Rejected WWN + The vport is not operational. The Fabric failed FDISC with a status + indicating that the WWN's are not valid. + + FC_VPORT_FAILED - VPort Failed + The vport is not operational. This is a catchall for all other + error conditions. + + + The following state table indicates the different state transitions: + + State Event New State + -------------------------------------------------------------------- + n/a Initialization Unknown + Unknown: Link Down Linkdown + Link Up & Loop No Fabric Support + Link Up & no Fabric No Fabric Support + Link Up & FLOGI response No Fabric Support + indicates no NPIV support + Link Up & FDISC being sent Initializing + Disable request Disable + Linkdown: Link Up Unknown + Initializing: FDISC ACC Active + FDISC LS_RJT w/ no resources No Fabric Resources + FDISC LS_RJT w/ invalid Fabric Rejected WWN + pname or invalid nport_id + FDISC LS_RJT failed for Vport Failed + other reasons + Link Down Linkdown + Disable request Disable + Disable: Enable request Unknown + Active: LOGO received from fabric Fabric Logout + Link Down Linkdown + Disable request Disable + Fabric Logout: Link still up Unknown + + The following 4 error states all have the same transitions: + No Fabric Support: + No Fabric Resources: + Fabric Rejected WWN: + Vport Failed: + Disable request Disable + Link goes down Linkdown + + +Transport <-> LLDD Interfaces : +------------------------------- + +Vport support by LLDD: + + The LLDD indicates support for vports by supplying a vport_create() + function in the transport template. The presence of this function will + cause the creation of the new attributes on the fc_host. As part of + the physical port completing its initialization relative to the + transport, it should set the max_npiv_vports attribute to indicate the + maximum number of vports the driver and/or adapter supports. + + +Vport Creation: + + The LLDD vport_create() syntax is: + + int vport_create(struct fc_vport *vport, bool disable) + + where: + vport: Is the newly allocated vport object + disable: If "true", the vport is to be created in a disabled stated. + If "false", the vport is to be enabled upon creation. + + When a request is made to create a new vport (via sgio/netlink, or the + vport_create fc_host attribute), the transport will validate that the LLDD + can support another vport (e.g. max_npiv_vports > npiv_vports_inuse). + If not, the create request will be failed. If space remains, the transport + will increment the vport count, create the vport object, and then call the + LLDD's vport_create() function with the newly allocated vport object. + + As mentioned above, vport creation is divided into two parts: + - Creation with the kernel and LLDD. This means all transport and + driver data structures are built up, and device objects created. + This is equivalent to a driver "attach" on an adapter, which is + independent of the adapter's link state. + - Instantiation of the vport on the FC link via ELS traffic, etc. + This is equivalent to a "link up" and successful link initialization. + + The LLDD's vport_create() function will not synchronously wait for both + parts to be fully completed before returning. It must validate that the + infrastructure exists to support NPIV, and complete the first part of + vport creation (data structure build up) before returning. We do not + hinge vport_create() on the link-side operation mainly because: + - The link may be down. It is not a failure if it is. It simply + means the vport is in an inoperable state until the link comes up. + This is consistent with the link bouncing post vport creation. + - The vport may be created in a disabled state. + - This is consistent with a model where: the vport equates to a + FC adapter. The vport_create is synonymous with driver attachment + to the adapter, which is independent of link state. + + Note: special error codes have been defined to delineate infrastructure + failure cases for quicker resolution. + + The expected behavior for the LLDD's vport_create() function is: + - Validate Infrastructure: + - If the driver or adapter cannot support another vport, whether + due to improper firmware, (a lie about) max_npiv, or a lack of + some other resource - return VPCERR_UNSUPPORTED. + - If the driver validates the WWN's against those already active on + the adapter and detects an overlap - return VPCERR_BAD_WWN. + - If the driver detects the topology is loop, non-fabric, or the + FLOGI did not support NPIV - return VPCERR_NO_FABRIC_SUPP. + - Allocate data structures. If errors are encountered, such as out + of memory conditions, return the respective negative Exxx error code. + - If the role is FCP Initiator, the LLDD is to : + - Call scsi_host_alloc() to allocate a scsi_host for the vport. + - Call scsi_add_host(new_shost, &vport->dev) to start the scsi_host + and bind it as a child of the vport device. + - Initializes the fc_host attribute values. + - Kick of further vport state transitions based on the disable flag and + link state - and return success (zero). + + LLDD Implementers Notes: + - It is suggested that there be a different fc_function_templates for + the physical port and the virtual port. The physical port's template + would have the vport_create, vport_delete, and vport_disable functions, + while the vports would not. + - It is suggested that there be different scsi_host_templates + for the physical port and virtual port. Likely, there are driver + attributes, embedded into the scsi_host_template, that are applicable + for the physical port only (link speed, topology setting, etc). This + ensures that the attributes are applicable to the respective scsi_host. + + +Vport Disable/Enable: + + The LLDD vport_disable() syntax is: + + int vport_disable(struct fc_vport *vport, bool disable) + + where: + vport: Is vport to be enabled or disabled + disable: If "true", the vport is to be disabled. + If "false", the vport is to be enabled. + + When a request is made to change the disabled state on a vport, the + transport will validate the request against the existing vport state. + If the request is to disable and the vport is already disabled, the + request will fail. Similarly, if the request is to enable, and the + vport is not in a disabled state, the request will fail. If the request + is valid for the vport state, the transport will call the LLDD to + change the vport's state. + + Within the LLDD, if a vport is disabled, it remains instantiated with + the kernel and LLDD, but it is not active or visible on the FC link in + any way. (see Vport Creation and the 2 part instantiation discussion). + The vport will remain in this state until it is deleted or re-enabled. + When enabling a vport, the LLDD reinstantiates the vport on the FC + link - essentially restarting the LLDD statemachine (see Vport States + above). + + +Vport Deletion: + + The LLDD vport_delete() syntax is: + + int vport_delete(struct fc_vport *vport) + + where: + vport: Is vport to delete + + When a request is made to delete a vport (via sgio/netlink, or via the + fc_host or fc_vport vport_delete attributes), the transport will call + the LLDD to terminate the vport on the FC link, and teardown all other + datastructures and references. If the LLDD completes successfully, + the transport will teardown the vport objects and complete the vport + removal. If the LLDD delete request fails, the vport object will remain, + but will be in an indeterminate state. + + Within the LLDD, the normal code paths for a scsi_host teardown should + be followed. E.g. If the vport has a FCP Initiator role, the LLDD + will call fc_remove_host() for the vports scsi_host, followed by + scsi_remove_host() and scsi_host_put() for the vports scsi_host. + + +Other: + fc_host port_type attribute: + There is a new fc_host port_type value - FC_PORTTYPE_NPIV. This value + must be set on all vport-based fc_hosts. Normally, on a physical port, + the port_type attribute would be set to NPORT, NLPORT, etc based on the + topology type and existence of the fabric. As this is not applicable to + a vport, it makes more sense to report the FC mechanism used to create + the vport. + + Driver unload: + FC drivers are required to call fc_remove_host() prior to calling + scsi_remove_host(). This allows the fc_host to tear down all remote + ports prior the scsi_host being torn down. The fc_remove_host() call + was updated to remove all vports for the fc_host as well. + + +Transport supplied functions +---------------------------- + +The following functions are supplied by the FC-transport for use by LLDs. + + fc_vport_create - create a vport + fc_vport_terminate - detach and remove a vport + +Details: + +/** + * fc_vport_create - Admin App or LLDD requests creation of a vport + * @shost: scsi host the virtual port is connected to. + * @ids: The world wide names, FC4 port roles, etc for + * the virtual port. + * + * Notes: + * This routine assumes no locks are held on entry. + */ +struct fc_vport * +fc_vport_create(struct Scsi_Host *shost, struct fc_vport_identifiers *ids) + +/** + * fc_vport_terminate - Admin App or LLDD requests termination of a vport + * @vport: fc_vport to be terminated + * + * Calls the LLDD vport_delete() function, then deallocates and removes + * the vport from the shost and object tree. + * + * Notes: + * This routine assumes no locks are held on entry. + */ +int +fc_vport_terminate(struct fc_vport *vport) + + +FC BSG support (CT & ELS passthru, and more) +======================================================================== +<< To Be Supplied >> + + + + + +Credits +======= +The following people have contributed to this document: + + + + + + +James Smart +james.smart@emulex.com + diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt index 8bbae3e1abd..d6a9bdeee7f 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ the motherboard (or both). Some aic7xxx based HBAs are dual controllers and thus represent two hosts. Like most modern HBAs, each aic7xxx host has its own PCI device address. [The one-to-one correspondence between a SCSI host and a PCI device is common but not required (e.g. with -ISA or MCA adapters).] +ISA adapters).] The SCSI mid level isolates an LLD from other layers such as the SCSI upper layer drivers and the block layer. @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ There is a SCSI documentation directory within the kernel source tree, typically Documentation/scsi . Most documents are in plain (i.e. ASCII) text. This file is named scsi_mid_low_api.txt and can be found in that directory. A more recent copy of this document may be found -at http://www.torque.net/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt.gz . +at http://web.archive.org/web/20070107183357rn_1/sg.torque.net/scsi/. Many LLDs are documented there (e.g. aic7xxx.txt). The SCSI mid-level is briefly described in scsi.txt which contains a url to a document describing the SCSI subsystem in the lk 2.4 series. Two upper level @@ -55,11 +55,6 @@ or in the same directory as the C source code. For example to find a url about the USB mass storage driver see the /usr/src/linux/drivers/usb/storage directory. -The Linux kernel source Documentation/DocBook/scsidrivers.tmpl file -refers to this file. With the appropriate DocBook tool-set, this permits -users to generate html, ps and pdf renderings of information within this -file (e.g. the interface functions). - Driver structure ================ Traditionally an LLD for the SCSI subsystem has been at least two files in @@ -375,7 +370,6 @@ Summary: scsi_add_device - creates new scsi device (lu) instance scsi_add_host - perform sysfs registration and set up transport class scsi_adjust_queue_depth - change the queue depth on a SCSI device - scsi_assign_lock - replace default host_lock with given lock scsi_bios_ptable - return copy of block device's partition table scsi_block_requests - prevent further commands being queued to given host scsi_deactivate_tcq - turn off tag command queueing @@ -489,20 +483,6 @@ void scsi_adjust_queue_depth(struct scsi_device * sdev, int tagged, /** - * scsi_assign_lock - replace default host_lock with given lock - * @shost: a pointer to a scsi host instance - * @lock: pointer to lock to replace host_lock for this host - * - * Returns nothing - * - * Might block: no - * - * Defined in: include/scsi/scsi_host.h . - **/ -void scsi_assign_lock(struct Scsi_Host *shost, spinlock_t *lock) - - -/** * scsi_bios_ptable - return copy of block device's partition table * @dev: pointer to block device * @@ -804,7 +784,6 @@ Summary: eh_bus_reset_handler - issue SCSI bus reset eh_device_reset_handler - issue SCSI device reset eh_host_reset_handler - reset host (host bus adapter) - eh_strategy_handler - driver supplied alternate to scsi_unjam_host() info - supply information about given host ioctl - driver can respond to ioctls proc_info - supports /proc/scsi/{driver_name}/{host_no} @@ -903,8 +882,11 @@ Details: * * Calling context: kernel thread * - * Notes: Invoked from scsi_eh thread. No other commands will be - * queued on current host during eh. + * Notes: If 'no_async_abort' is defined this callback + * will be invoked from scsi_eh thread. No other commands + * will then be queued on current host during eh. + * Otherwise it will be called whenever scsi_times_out() + * is called due to a command timeout. * * Optionally defined in: LLD **/ @@ -970,24 +952,6 @@ Details: /** - * eh_strategy_handler - driver supplied alternate to scsi_unjam_host() - * @shp: host on which error has occurred - * - * Returns TRUE if host unjammed, else FALSE. - * - * Locks: none - * - * Calling context: kernel thread - * - * Notes: Invoked from scsi_eh thread. LLD supplied alternate to - * scsi_unjam_host() found in scsi_error.c - * - * Optionally defined in: LLD - **/ - int eh_strategy_handler(struct Scsi_Host * shp) - - -/** * info - supply information about given host: driver name plus data * to distinguish given host * @shp: host to supply information about @@ -1078,9 +1042,9 @@ Details: /** - * queuecommand - queue scsi command, invoke 'done' on completion + * queuecommand - queue scsi command, invoke scp->scsi_done on completion + * @shost: pointer to the scsi host object * @scp: pointer to scsi command object - * @done: function pointer to be invoked on completion * * Returns 0 on success. * @@ -1108,42 +1072,45 @@ Details: * * Other types of errors that are detected immediately may be * flagged by setting scp->result to an appropriate value, - * invoking the 'done' callback, and then returning 0 from this - * function. If the command is not performed immediately (and the - * LLD is starting (or will start) the given command) then this - * function should place 0 in scp->result and return 0. + * invoking the scp->scsi_done callback, and then returning 0 + * from this function. If the command is not performed + * immediately (and the LLD is starting (or will start) the given + * command) then this function should place 0 in scp->result and + * return 0. * * Command ownership. If the driver returns zero, it owns the - * command and must take responsibility for ensuring the 'done' - * callback is executed. Note: the driver may call done before - * returning zero, but after it has called done, it may not - * return any value other than zero. If the driver makes a - * non-zero return, it must not execute the command's done - * callback at any time. - * - * Locks: struct Scsi_Host::host_lock held on entry (with "irqsave") - * and is expected to be held on return. + * command and must take responsibility for ensuring the + * scp->scsi_done callback is executed. Note: the driver may + * call scp->scsi_done before returning zero, but after it has + * called scp->scsi_done, it may not return any value other than + * zero. If the driver makes a non-zero return, it must not + * execute the command's scsi_done callback at any time. + * + * Locks: up to and including 2.6.36, struct Scsi_Host::host_lock + * held on entry (with "irqsave") and is expected to be + * held on return. From 2.6.37 onwards, queuecommand is + * called without any locks held. * * Calling context: in interrupt (soft irq) or process context * - * Notes: This function should be relatively fast. Normally it will - * not wait for IO to complete. Hence the 'done' callback is invoked - * (often directly from an interrupt service routine) some time after - * this function has returned. In some cases (e.g. pseudo adapter - * drivers that manufacture the response to a SCSI INQUIRY) - * the 'done' callback may be invoked before this function returns. - * If the 'done' callback is not invoked within a certain period - * the SCSI mid level will commence error processing. - * If a status of CHECK CONDITION is placed in "result" when the - * 'done' callback is invoked, then the LLD driver should - * perform autosense and fill in the struct scsi_cmnd::sense_buffer + * Notes: This function should be relatively fast. Normally it + * will not wait for IO to complete. Hence the scp->scsi_done + * callback is invoked (often directly from an interrupt service + * routine) some time after this function has returned. In some + * cases (e.g. pseudo adapter drivers that manufacture the + * response to a SCSI INQUIRY) the scp->scsi_done callback may be + * invoked before this function returns. If the scp->scsi_done + * callback is not invoked within a certain period the SCSI mid + * level will commence error processing. If a status of CHECK + * CONDITION is placed in "result" when the scp->scsi_done + * callback is invoked, then the LLD driver should perform + * autosense and fill in the struct scsi_cmnd::sense_buffer * array. The scsi_cmnd::sense_buffer array is zeroed prior to * the mid level queuing a command to an LLD. * * Defined in: LLD **/ - int queuecommand(struct scsi_cmnd * scp, - void (*done)(struct scsi_cmnd *)) + int queuecommand(struct Scsi_Host *shost, struct scsi_cmnd * scp) /** @@ -1293,6 +1260,8 @@ of interest: address space use_clustering - 1=>SCSI commands in mid level's queue can be merged, 0=>disallow SCSI command merging + no_async_abort - 1=>Asynchronous aborts are not supported + 0=>Timed-out commands will be aborted asynchronously hostt - pointer to driver's struct scsi_host_template from which this struct Scsi_Host instance was spawned hostt->proc_name - name of LLD. This is the driver name that sysfs uses @@ -1305,6 +1274,11 @@ of interest: hostdata[0] - area reserved for LLD at end of struct Scsi_Host. Size is set by the second argument (named 'xtr_bytes') to scsi_host_alloc() or scsi_register(). + vendor_id - a unique value that identifies the vendor supplying + the LLD for the Scsi_Host. Used most often in validating + vendor-specific message requests. Value consists of an + identifier type and a vendor-specific value. + See scsi_netlink.h for a description of valid formats. The scsi_host structure is defined in include/scsi/scsi_host.h @@ -1369,7 +1343,7 @@ Members of interest: underruns (overruns should be rare). If possible an LLD should set 'resid' prior to invoking 'done'. The most interesting case is data transfers from a SCSI target - device device (i.e. READs) that underrun. + device (e.g. READs) that underrun. underflow - LLD should place (DID_ERROR << 16) in 'result' if actual number of bytes transferred is less than this figure. Not many LLDs implement this check and some that @@ -1377,6 +1351,18 @@ Members of interest: report a DID_ERROR. Better for an LLD to implement 'resid'. +It is recommended that a LLD set 'resid' on data transfers from a SCSI +target device (e.g. READs). It is especially important that 'resid' is set +when such data transfers have sense keys of MEDIUM ERROR and HARDWARE ERROR +(and possibly RECOVERED ERROR). In these cases if a LLD is in doubt how much +data has been received then the safest approach is to indicate no bytes have +been received. For example: to indicate that no valid data has been received +a LLD might use these helpers: + scsi_set_resid(SCpnt, scsi_bufflen(SCpnt)); +where 'SCpnt' is a pointer to a scsi_cmnd object. To indicate only three 512 +bytes blocks has been received 'resid' could be set like this: + scsi_set_resid(SCpnt, scsi_bufflen(SCpnt) - (3 * 512)); + The scsi_cmnd structure is defined in include/scsi/scsi_cmnd.h @@ -1385,17 +1371,11 @@ Locks Each struct Scsi_Host instance has a spin_lock called struct Scsi_Host::default_lock which is initialized in scsi_host_alloc() [found in hosts.c]. Within the same function the struct Scsi_Host::host_lock pointer -is initialized to point at default_lock with the scsi_assign_lock() function. -Thereafter lock and unlock operations performed by the mid level use the -struct Scsi_Host::host_lock pointer. - -LLDs can override the use of struct Scsi_Host::default_lock by -using scsi_assign_lock(). The earliest opportunity to do this would -be in the detect() function after it has invoked scsi_register(). It -could be replaced by a coarser grain lock (e.g. per driver) or a -lock of equal granularity (i.e. per host). Using finer grain locks -(e.g. per SCSI device) may be possible by juggling locks in -queuecommand(). +is initialized to point at default_lock. Thereafter lock and unlock +operations performed by the mid level use the struct Scsi_Host::host_lock +pointer. Previously drivers could override the host_lock pointer but +this is not allowed anymore. + Autosense ========= @@ -1447,7 +1427,7 @@ Credits ======= The following people have contributed to this document: Mike Anderson <andmike at us dot ibm dot com> - James Bottomley <James dot Bottomley at steeleye dot com> + James Bottomley <James dot Bottomley at hansenpartnership dot com> Patrick Mansfield <patmans at us dot ibm dot com> Christoph Hellwig <hch at infradead dot org> Doug Ledford <dledford at redhat dot com> diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_transport_srp/Makefile b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_transport_srp/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5f6b567e955 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_transport_srp/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +all: rport_state_diagram.svg rport_state_diagram.png + +rport_state_diagram.svg: rport_state_diagram.dot + dot -Tsvg -o $@ $< + +rport_state_diagram.png: rport_state_diagram.dot + dot -Tpng -o $@ $< diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_transport_srp/rport_state_diagram.dot b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_transport_srp/rport_state_diagram.dot new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..75d610d6411 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_transport_srp/rport_state_diagram.dot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +digraph srp_initiator { + node [shape = doublecircle]; running lost; + node [shape = circle]; + + { + rank = min; + running_rta [ label = "running;\nreconnect\ntimer\nactive" ]; + }; + running [ label = "running;\nreconnect\ntimer\nstopped" ]; + blocked; + failfast [ label = "fail I/O\nfast" ]; + lost; + + running -> running_rta [ label = "fast_io_fail_tmo = off and\ndev_loss_tmo = off;\nsrp_start_tl_fail_timers()" ]; + running_rta -> running [ label = "fast_io_fail_tmo = off and\ndev_loss_tmo = off;\nreconnecting succeeded" ]; + running -> blocked [ label = "fast_io_fail_tmo >= 0 or\ndev_loss_tmo >= 0;\nsrp_start_tl_fail_timers()" ]; + running -> failfast [ label = "fast_io_fail_tmo = off and\ndev_loss_tmo = off;\nreconnecting failed\n" ]; + blocked -> failfast [ label = "fast_io_fail_tmo\nexpired or\nreconnecting\nfailed" ]; + blocked -> lost [ label = "dev_loss_tmo\nexpired or\nsrp_stop_rport_timers()" ]; + failfast -> lost [ label = "dev_loss_tmo\nexpired or\nsrp_stop_rport_timers()" ]; + blocked -> running [ label = "reconnecting\nsucceeded" ]; + failfast -> failfast [ label = "reconnecting\nfailed" ]; + failfast -> running [ label = "reconnecting\nsucceeded" ]; + running -> lost [ label = "srp_stop_rport_timers()" ]; + running_rta -> lost [ label = "srp_stop_rport_timers()" ]; +} diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/st.txt b/Documentation/scsi/st.txt index 20e30cf3187..f346abbdd6f 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/st.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/st.txt @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ This file contains brief information about the SCSI tape driver. -The driver is currently maintained by Kai Mäkisara (email +The driver is currently maintained by Kai Mäkisara (email Kai.Makisara@kolumbus.fi) -Last modified: Mon Mar 7 21:14:44 2005 by kai.makisara +Last modified: Sun Aug 29 18:25:47 2010 by kai.makisara BASICS @@ -85,6 +85,17 @@ writing and the last operation has been a write. Two filemarks can be optionally written. In both cases end of data is signified by returning zero bytes for two consecutive reads. +Writing filemarks without the immediate bit set in the SCSI command block acts +as a synchronization point, i.e., all remaining data form the drive buffers is +written to tape before the command returns. This makes sure that write errors +are caught at that point, but this takes time. In some applications, several +consecutive files must be written fast. The MTWEOFI operation can be used to +write the filemarks without flushing the drive buffer. Writing filemark at +close() is always flushing the drive buffers. However, if the previous +operation is MTWEOFI, close() does not write a filemark. This can be used if +the program wants to close/open the tape device between files and wants to +skip waiting. + If rewind, offline, bsf, or seek is done and previous tape operation was write, a filemark is written before moving tape. @@ -101,10 +112,8 @@ attempted). MINOR NUMBERS -The tape driver currently supports 128 drives by default. This number -can be increased by editing st.h and recompiling the driver if -necessary. The upper limit is 2^17 drives if 4 modes for each drive -are used. +The tape driver currently supports up to 2^17 drives if 4 modes for +each drive are used. The minor numbers consist of the following bit fields: @@ -133,6 +142,11 @@ the defaults set by the user. The value -1 means the default is not set. The file 'dev' contains the device numbers corresponding to this device. The links 'device' and 'driver' point to the SCSI device and driver entries. +Each directory also contains the entry 'options' which shows the currently +enabled driver and mode options. The value in the file is a bit mask where the +bit definitions are the same as those used with MTSETDRVBUFFER in setting the +options. + A link named 'tape' is made from the SCSI device directory to the class directory corresponding to the mode 0 auto-rewind device (e.g., st0). @@ -249,7 +263,7 @@ BOOT TIME CONFIGURATION If the driver is compiled into the kernel, the same parameters can be also set using, e.g., the LILO command line. The preferred syntax is -is to use the same keyword used when loading as module but prepended +to use the same keyword used when loading as module but prepended with 'st.'. For instance, to set the maximum number of scatter/gather segments, the parameter 'st.max_sg_segs=xx' should be used (xx is the number of scatter/gather segments). @@ -261,7 +275,7 @@ pairs are separated with a comma (no spaces allowed). A colon can be used instead of the equal mark. The definition is prepended by the string st=. Here is an example: - st=buffer_kbs:64,write_threhold_kbs:60 + st=buffer_kbs:64,write_threshold_kbs:60 The following syntax used by the old kernel versions is also supported: @@ -296,6 +310,8 @@ MTBSR Space backward over count records. MTFSS Space forward over count setmarks. MTBSS Space backward over count setmarks. MTWEOF Write count filemarks. +MTWEOFI Write count filemarks with immediate bit set (i.e., does not + wait until data is on tape) MTWSM Write count setmarks. MTREW Rewind tape. MTOFFL Set device off line (often rewind plus eject). @@ -369,9 +385,18 @@ MTSETDRVBUFFER the device dependent address. It is recommended to set this flag unless there are tapes using the device dependent (from the old times) (global) - MT_ST_SYSV sets the SYSV sematics (mode) + MT_ST_SYSV sets the SYSV semantics (mode) MT_ST_NOWAIT enables immediate mode (i.e., don't wait for the command to finish) for some commands (e.g., rewind) + MT_ST_NOWAIT_EOF enables immediate filemark mode (i.e. when + writing a filemark, don't wait for it to complete). Please + see the BASICS note about MTWEOFI with respect to the + possible dangers of writing immediate filemarks. + MT_ST_SILI enables setting the SILI bit in SCSI commands when + reading in variable block mode to enhance performance when + reading blocks shorter than the byte count; set this only + if you are sure that the drive supports SILI and the HBA + correctly returns transfer residuals MT_ST_DEBUGGING debugging (global; debugging must be compiled into the driver) MT_ST_SETBOOLEANS diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/sym53c8xx_2.txt b/Documentation/scsi/sym53c8xx_2.txt index 7f516cdcd26..6af8f7a7770 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/sym53c8xx_2.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/sym53c8xx_2.txt @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ under Linux is contained in 2 files named sym_glue.h and sym_glue.c. Other drivers files are intended not to depend on the Operating System on which the driver is used. -The history of this driver can be summerized as follows: +The history of this driver can be summarized as follows: 1993: ncr driver written for 386bsd and FreeBSD by: Wolfgang Stanglmeier <wolf@cologne.de> @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ characteristics. This feature may also reduce average command latency. In order to really gain advantage of this feature, devices must have a reasonable cache size (No miracle is to be expected for a low-end hard disk with 128 KB or less). -Some kown old SCSI devices do not properly support tagged command queuing. +Some known old SCSI devices do not properly support tagged command queuing. Generally, firmware revisions that fix this kind of problems are available at respective vendor web/ftp sites. All I can say is that I never have had problem with tagged queuing using @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ from the driver. 7. Profiling information -This driver does not provide profiling informations as did its predecessors. +This driver does not provide profiling information as did its predecessors. This feature was not this useful and added complexity to the code. As the driver code got more complex, I have decided to remove everything that didn't seem actually useful. @@ -449,25 +449,14 @@ options as above. cmd_per_lun=#tags (#tags > 1) tagged command queuing enabled #tags will be truncated to the max queued commands configuration parameter. -10.2.2 Detailed control of tagged commands - This option allows you to specify a command queue depth for each device - that supports tagged command queueing. - Example: - tag_ctrl=10/t2t3q16-t5q24/t1u2q32 - will set devices queue depth as follow: - - controller #0 target #2 and target #3 -> 16 commands, - - controller #0 target #5 -> 24 commands, - - controller #1 target #1 logical unit #2 -> 32 commands, - - all other logical units (all targets, all controllers) -> 10 commands. - -10.2.3 Burst max +10.2.2 Burst max burst=0 burst disabled burst=255 get burst length from initial IO register settings. burst=#x burst enabled (1<<#x burst transfers max) #x is an integer value which is log base 2 of the burst transfers max. By default the driver uses the maximum value supported by the chip. -10.2.4 LED support +10.2.3 LED support led=1 enable LED support led=0 disable LED support Do not enable LED support if your scsi board does not use SDMS BIOS. @@ -560,9 +549,9 @@ Previously, the sym2 driver accepted arguments of the form sym53c8xx=tags:4,sync:10,debug:0x200 As a result of the new module parameters, this is no longer available. -Most of the options have remained the same, but tags has split into -cmd_per_lun and tag_ctrl for its two different purposes. The sample above -would be specified as: +Most of the options have remained the same, but tags has become +cmd_per_lun to reflect its different purposes. The sample above would +be specified as: modprobe sym53c8xx cmd_per_lun=4 sync=10 debug=0x200 or on the kernel boot line as: @@ -587,7 +576,7 @@ devices, ... may cause a SCSI signal to be wrong when te driver reads it. 15.1 Problem tracking Most SCSI problems are due to a non conformant SCSI bus or too buggy -devices. If infortunately you have SCSI problems, you can check the +devices. If unfortunately you have SCSI problems, you can check the following things: - SCSI bus cables @@ -609,7 +598,7 @@ appropriate mailing lists or news-groups. Send me a copy in order to be sure I will receive it. Obviously, a bug in the driver code is possible. - My cyrrent email address: Gerard Roudier <groudier@free.fr> + My current email address: Gerard Roudier <groudier@free.fr> Allowing disconnections is important if you use several devices on your SCSI bus but often causes problems with buggy devices. @@ -684,7 +673,7 @@ Field H : SCNTL3 Scsi Control Register 3 Contains the setting of timing values for both asynchronous and synchronous data transfers. Field I : SCNTL4 Scsi Control Register 4 - Only meaninful for 53C1010 Ultra3 controllers. + Only meaningful for 53C1010 Ultra3 controllers. Understanding Fields J, K, L and dumps requires to have good knowledge of SCSI standards, chip cores functionnals and internal driver data structures. @@ -698,7 +687,7 @@ maintain the driver code. Enabling serial NVRAM support enables detection of the serial NVRAM included on Symbios and some Symbios compatible host adaptors, and Tekram boards. The serial NVRAM is used by Symbios and Tekram to hold set up parameters for the -host adaptor and it's attached drives. +host adaptor and its attached drives. The Symbios NVRAM also holds data on the boot order of host adaptors in a system with more than one host adaptor. This information is no longer used diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/tmscsim.txt b/Documentation/scsi/tmscsim.txt index e165229adf5..3303d218b32 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/tmscsim.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/tmscsim.txt @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Tekram DC390(T) adapter. This is where the name comes from: tm = Tekram scsi = SCSI driver, m = AMD (?) as opposed to w for the DC390W/U/F (NCR53c8X5, X=2/7) driver. Yes, there was also a driver for the latter, tmscsiw, which supported DC390W/U/F adapters. It's not maintained any more, -as the ncr53c8xx is perfectly supporting these adpaters since some time. +as the ncr53c8xx is perfectly supporting these adapters since some time. The driver first appeared in April 1996, exclusively supported the DC390 and has been enhanced since then in various steps. In May 1998 support for @@ -102,14 +102,14 @@ So take at least the following measures: ftp://student.physik.uni-dortmund.de/pub/linux/kernel/bootdisk.gz One more warning: I used to overclock my PCI bus to 41.67 MHz. My Tekram -DC390F (Sym53c875) accepted this as well as my Millenium. But the Am53C974 +DC390F (Sym53c875) accepted this as well as my Millennium. But the Am53C974 produced errors and started to corrupt my disks. So don't do that! A 37.50 MHz PCI bus works for me, though, but I don't recommend using higher clocks than the 33.33 MHz being in the PCI spec. If you want to share the IRQ with another device and the driver refuses to do so, you might succeed with changing the DC390_IRQ type in tmscsim.c to -SA_SHIRQ | SA_INTERRUPT. +IRQF_SHARED | IRQF_DISABLED. 3.Features @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ Please see http://www.garloff.de/kurt/linux/dc390/problems.html replaced by the dev index of your scanner). You may try to reset your SCSI bus afterwards (echo "RESET" >/proc/scsi/tmscsim/?). The problem seems to be solved as of 2.0d18, thanks to Andreas Rick. -* If there is a valid partition table, the driver will use it for determing +* If there is a valid partition table, the driver will use it for determining the mapping. If there's none, a reasonable mapping (Symbios-like) will be assumed. Other operating systems may not like this mapping, though it's consistent with the BIOS' behaviour. Old DC390 drivers ignored the @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Thanks to Linus Torvalds, Alan Cox, the FSF people, the XFree86 team and all the others for the wonderful OS and software. Thanks to C.L. Huang and Philip Giang (Tekram) for the initial driver release and support. -Thanks to Doug Ledford, Gérard Roudier for support with SCSI coding. +Thanks to Doug Ledford, Gérard Roudier for support with SCSI coding. Thanks to a lot of people (espec. Chiaki Ishikawa, Andreas Haumer, Hubert Tonneau) for intensively testing the driver (and even risking data loss doing this during early revisions). diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ufs.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ufs.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..41a6164592a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ufs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + Universal Flash Storage + ======================= + + +Contents +-------- + +1. Overview +2. UFS Architecture Overview + 2.1 Application Layer + 2.2 UFS Transport Protocol(UTP) layer + 2.3 UFS Interconnect(UIC) Layer +3. UFSHCD Overview + 3.1 UFS controller initialization + 3.2 UTP Transfer requests + 3.3 UFS error handling + 3.4 SCSI Error handling + + +1. Overview +----------- + +Universal Flash Storage(UFS) is a storage specification for flash devices. +It is aimed to provide a universal storage interface for both +embedded and removable flash memory based storage in mobile +devices such as smart phones and tablet computers. The specification +is defined by JEDEC Solid State Technology Association. UFS is based +on MIPI M-PHY physical layer standard. UFS uses MIPI M-PHY as the +physical layer and MIPI Unipro as the link layer. + +The main goals of UFS is to provide, + * Optimized performance: + For UFS version 1.0 and 1.1 the target performance is as follows, + Support for Gear1 is mandatory (rate A: 1248Mbps, rate B: 1457.6Mbps) + Support for Gear2 is optional (rate A: 2496Mbps, rate B: 2915.2Mbps) + Future version of the standard, + Gear3 (rate A: 4992Mbps, rate B: 5830.4Mbps) + * Low power consumption + * High random IOPs and low latency + + +2. UFS Architecture Overview +---------------------------- + +UFS has a layered communication architecture which is based on SCSI +SAM-5 architectural model. + +UFS communication architecture consists of following layers, + +2.1 Application Layer + + The Application layer is composed of UFS command set layer(UCS), + Task Manager and Device manager. The UFS interface is designed to be + protocol agnostic, however SCSI has been selected as a baseline + protocol for versions 1.0 and 1.1 of UFS protocol layer. + UFS supports subset of SCSI commands defined by SPC-4 and SBC-3. + * UCS: It handles SCSI commands supported by UFS specification. + * Task manager: It handles task management functions defined by the + UFS which are meant for command queue control. + * Device manager: It handles device level operations and device + configuration operations. Device level operations mainly involve + device power management operations and commands to Interconnect + layers. Device level configurations involve handling of query + requests which are used to modify and retrieve configuration + information of the device. + +2.2 UFS Transport Protocol(UTP) layer + + UTP layer provides services for + the higher layers through Service Access Points. UTP defines 3 + service access points for higher layers. + * UDM_SAP: Device manager service access point is exposed to device + manager for device level operations. These device level operations + are done through query requests. + * UTP_CMD_SAP: Command service access point is exposed to UFS command + set layer(UCS) to transport commands. + * UTP_TM_SAP: Task management service access point is exposed to task + manager to transport task management functions. + UTP transports messages through UFS protocol information unit(UPIU). + +2.3 UFS Interconnect(UIC) Layer + + UIC is the lowest layer of UFS layered architecture. It handles + connection between UFS host and UFS device. UIC consists of + MIPI UniPro and MIPI M-PHY. UIC provides 2 service access points + to upper layer, + * UIC_SAP: To transport UPIU between UFS host and UFS device. + * UIO_SAP: To issue commands to Unipro layers. + + +3. UFSHCD Overview +------------------ + +The UFS host controller driver is based on Linux SCSI Framework. +UFSHCD is a low level device driver which acts as an interface between +SCSI Midlayer and PCIe based UFS host controllers. + +The current UFSHCD implementation supports following functionality, + +3.1 UFS controller initialization + + The initialization module brings UFS host controller to active state + and prepares the controller to transfer commands/response between + UFSHCD and UFS device. + +3.2 UTP Transfer requests + + Transfer request handling module of UFSHCD receives SCSI commands + from SCSI Midlayer, forms UPIUs and issues the UPIUs to UFS Host + controller. Also, the module decodes, responses received from UFS + host controller in the form of UPIUs and intimates the SCSI Midlayer + of the status of the command. + +3.3 UFS error handling + + Error handling module handles Host controller fatal errors, + Device fatal errors and UIC interconnect layer related errors. + +3.4 SCSI Error handling + + This is done through UFSHCD SCSI error handling routines registered + with SCSI Midlayer. Examples of some of the error handling commands + issues by SCSI Midlayer are Abort task, Lun reset and host reset. + UFSHCD Routines to perform these tasks are registered with + SCSI Midlayer through .eh_abort_handler, .eh_device_reset_handler and + .eh_host_reset_handler. + +In this version of UFSHCD Query requests and power management +functionality are not implemented. + +UFS Specifications can be found at, +UFS - http://www.jedec.org/sites/default/files/docs/JESD220.pdf +UFSHCI - http://www.jedec.org/sites/default/files/docs/JESD223.pdf |